New Scheme of Examination for B.A Health & Physical Education-2011

New Scheme of Examination for B.A Health & Physical Education-2011.

Time: 3 hours

B.A. Health & Physical Education Theory Int. Assessment Total Semester –Ist. 60 15 75 Semester IInd. 60 15 75 Practical -- -- 50 Semester IIIrd. 60 15 75 Semester IVth. 60 15 75 Practical -- -- 50 Total 400 .

42(1) SEMESTER – I B.A. -- Health & Physical Education Time: Three hours Theory – 60 Marks Internal Assessment—15 Marks Instructions for Paper Setter :

The question paper will consist of five Units I,II,III,IV&V. Units I,II,III&IV will have two questions from their respective Units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘V th.’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each.

Instructions for Candidates

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from section I,II,III,IV and Vth Unit is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Definition of Physical Education. Importance of Physical Education. Relationship of Physical Education with general education and recreation. Concept of Leadership and Qualities of a good Leader.

Unit – II Meaning and Importance of Health. Health Education – Its meaning and Importance. Role of media in imparting instructions of Health Education. Personal Hygiene –meaning, and its importance, factors affecting personal hygiene. Unit – III History of Development of Physical Education in India before and after independence. Concept of Yoga and historical Development of Yoga. Types of Yoga. Pranayama –meaning and its techniques, Importance of Yoga in daily life.

UNIT – IV Anatomy and Physiology – Meaning and Its Importance in Physical Education, Skeleton System- Bones of the body, kinds and functions of bones, joints and their types. Digestive System- alimentary canal, digestion and absorption of food. Muscular System- Muscles, its types and functions Effect of Exercises on Skeleton , Muscular and Muscular Systemes.

42(2) REFERENCES:

1. Wilmore,jack H and Costill,David L, Physiology of sports and exercise. Human Kinetics. 1994. 2. Rowland ,Thomas W.Childern’s exercise Physiology .2nd Edition Human Kinetics,2005. 3. HYGIENIC AND PUBLIC HEALTH ,1991. 4. Nemir.A. THE SCHOOL HELTH EDUCATION,New York: Harper and borther 1991. 5. Chauhan B.S.,Khel Jagat Mein Athletics, Jalandhar: A.P. Pub.,1999. 6. Fox,E.L.,Physiological Basis of Physical Education and Athletics ,Browm Pub.,1989. 7. Anand Om Parkash ,Yoga Dawara Kaya Kalp , Kanpur, Sewasth Sahitya Perkashan,2001. 8. Kamlesh,M.L.Priniciples &History of Phy.Edu.,Prakash Bros., Patiala,1991. 9. Bucher,G.A.(1992)Foundation of Phy.Edu.Sports. 10. Pearce.E.Anatomy &Physiology for Nurses ,Delhi,Oxford University Press,1989. 11. Rao.,C.V,Kabaddi ;Native Indian Sports,Patiala Nis Publisher,1983. 12. American Program, Coaching Youth Volley Ball Campaigon ,H.K,1996. 13. Singh M.K.,Comprehensive Badminton,N.D.Friends Pub.2007 .

42(3) SEMESTER – II

Time: Three hours Theory – 60 Marks Internal Assessment - 15 Marks

Instructions for Paper Setter:

The question paper will consist of five Units I,II,III,IV&V. Unit I,II,III&IV will have two questions from their respective Units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘Vth’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each.

Instructions for Candidates

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from section I,II,III,IV and Vth Unit is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Aims and Objectives of Physical Education Scope of Physical Education Qualities and Qualification of Physical Education Teacher

Unit – II History of Physical Education in Germany and Greece Concepts of Physical Fitness and Its components Importance of Physical Fitnes in Games and Sports. Dimensions of playgrounds of Volleyball, Kabaddi and Athletic events –sprints and jumps, interpretations of their rules and regulations. Unit – III Aims, Objectives and Scope of Health Education Factors Influencing Health Concept of Posture and Postural Deformities. Balance Diet and Its Constituents

Unit – IV Respiratory System- Various organs of respiratory system, process of respiration system. Excretory System- Kidney and its functions. Effect of Exercise on Respiratory System, and Excretory Systems.

42(4) PRACTICAL

Note: The candidates are required to perform various asanas and other practical aspect as per instructions of the external examiners.

Practical—50 Marks Asanas

i) Padamasana 10 Marks ii) Vajrasana iii) Sarvangasana iv) Halasana v) Shavasana

Any one game from the following : 10 Marks i) Volleyball ii) Kabaddi iii) Table tennis iv) Badmintion

First Aid – Bandages, Slings, Transportation of Injured Person 10 Marks

Any two Athletic Events –Spirints and Jumps 10 Marks

Viva-Voce and Practical File 10 Marks

REFERENCES:

42(5) SEMESTER –IIIrd. B.A. - Health & Physical Education

Time: Three hours Theory – 60 Marks Internal Assessment - 15 Marks

Instructions for Paper Setter :

The question paper will consist of five Units Ist, IInd.,IIIrd,IVth.&Vth. . The Unit Ist, IInd,IIIrd & IVth. will have two questions from each Unit (Ist. to IVth.) carrying 10 marks each and Unit ‘Vth’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each.

Instructions for Candidates The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit (1 st. to IVth. ) and Unit Vth. is compulsory for all.

Unit – I Sports and Safety Education i) Meaning, need and importance of safety education. ii) Meaning, aim, objectives and scope of first aid in Physical Education and Sports. iii) First aid for different sports injuries i.e Abrasion, contusion, sprain, strain, dislocation and fracture. Unit-II Communicable diseases i) Concept of communicable and non-communicable diseases. ii) Modes of transmission, prevention and control of communicable diseases. iii) Some Communicable Diseases : HIV/AIDS, Viral Hepatitis, Chckengunia, Dengue, typhoid, Melaria and influenza. Unit – III Physical Fitness i) Definition and components of health related fitness. ii) Factors influencing physical fitness iii) Methods to develop health related physical fitness components Unit-IV – Yoga i) Meaning and importance of yogasanas. ii) Types of Yogasanas i.e Meditativeasanas, Relaxiveasanas and Culturalasanas. iii) Preparation, Precautions and benefits of the following Yogasanas: Vajrasana, Dhanurasana, Sarvangasana, Gomukhasanas, Suptvajrasana, Purn-Matschhenderasna, Garudasana.

42(6) SEMESTER –IVth. B.A. - Health & Physical Education

Time: Three hours Theory – 60 Marks Internal Assessment - 15 Marks

Instructions for Paper Setter :

Instructions for Candidates The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit (1 st. to IVth. ) and Unit Vth. is compulsory for all. Unit. I- Warming up and Cooling down i) Meaning, types and significance of warming up. ii) Various methods of warming-up. iii) Importance of cooling down. Unit. II - Psychological Aspects of Physical Education i) Meaning, type and importance of motivation in physical education. ii) Methods of motivation. iii) Competition and cooperation in physical education and sports Unit. III- Various agencies in game and sports i) All India Council of Sports. ii) All India Olympic Association. iii) National and States Federation of different games. Unit. IV- Ashtang yog. i) Meaning and parts of Ashtang yog. ii) Yam, Niyam, iii) Dharna, Dhyan, Samadhi and the importance of Ashtang yog in physical education and sports.

References 1. Dr. Ajmer Singh, Dr. Jagdish Bains, Dr. Jagtar Singh Gill, Dr. B.S. Brar, Dr. Nirmaljit Rathee : Essentials of Physical Education, Kalyani Publication, Ludhiana, New Delhi, Noida (U.P), Hyderabad, Chennai, Kolcotta, cuttak. 2. Dr. S.K.Munjal, Dr. Uma Munjal, Satish Kumar ‘Mana’. Yog Shiksha Arya Book Dipo, Karolbagh, New Delhi- 110005. 3. Dr. Hardyal Singh, Science of Sports Training, D.V.S.Publications, New Delhi. 4. Manjeet Kaur : Health and Physical Education, Tandon Publication, ludhiana. 5. Robert Burton : Sports Psychology, Motivation, Participation and performance. Sports Educational Technology, New Delhi-110002. 6. Dr. G.S.Kang and N.S Deol : Physical Education, A.P.Publishers.

42(7) (B.A.IVth. Semester)

PRACTICAL

Note : The candidates are required to perform various Pranayamas and other practical aspect as per instructions of the external examiners. Pranayamas Practical : 50 Marks i) Surya Bhedan 20 Marks ii) Chander Bhedan iii) Ujjai iv) Bharamari v) Anulom Vilom

Any one game from the following : 10 Marks i) Kho-Kho ii) Wrestling iii) Football iv) Basketball

Any two Athletic Events 10 Marks i) Middle races ii) Throws Viva-Voce and Practical File 10 Marks REFERENCE

1.Willmore, jack H and Costill, David L, Physiology of sports and exercise. Human Kinetics. 1994. 2. Rowland, Thomas W.Childern’s exercise Physiology 2nd. Edition Human kinetics, 2005. 3. HYGIENIC AND PUBLIC HEALTH, 1991. 4. Nemir.A.THE SCHOOL HEALTH EDUCATION, New York : Harper and brother 1991. 5. Chauhan B.S.,Khel jagat mein Athletics, jalandhar : A.P. Pub.,1999. 6. Fox, E.L., Physiological Basis of Physical Education and Athletics, Brown Pub. 1989. 7. Anand Om Parkash, Yoga Dawara Kaya Kalp, Kanpur, Sewasth Sahitya Perkashan, 2001. 8. Kamlesh, M.L. Principles & History of Phy.Edu., Prakash Bros., Patiala, 1991. 9. Bucher,G.A(1992) Foundation of Phy.Edu. Sports. 10. Pearce. E.Anatomy & Physiology for Nurses, Delhi, Oxford University Press,1989. 11. Rao., C.V.Kabaddi; Native Indian Sports, Patiala Nis Publisher, 1983. 12. American Program, Coaching Youth Volley Ball Campaigon, H.K.,1996. 13. Singh M.K., Comprehensive Badminton, N.D.Friends Pub.2007.

42(8) Scheme of Examination for B.Sc (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports).- Six Semester Course.

Ist. Semester: Marks Int. Assessment Total

Paper-I English (Compulsory) 60 15 75 Paper- II Hindi (Compulsory) 60 15 75 Paper-III Paper- I II Foundation of Phy. Education and Sports 80 20 100 Paper-IV Anatomy and Physiology 60 15 75 Paper- V Theory of games and sports-I 60 15 75 (Athletics and Gymnastics) Paper-VI Theory of games of sports-II 60 15 75 (Volleyball Game and Yoga)

Total Marks: 475

IInd. Semester: Marks Int. Assessment

Paper-I English (Compulsory) 60 15 75 Paper-II Hindi (Compulsory ) 60 15 75 Paper-III Foundation of Phy. Education and Sports 80 20 100 Paper-IV Anatomy and Physiology (Theory) 60 15 75 (Practical) 50

Paper-V Theory of games and sports-I 60 15 75 (Track & Field and Gymnastics) Practical (Track & Field, Gymnastic) 50 Paper-VI Theory of games of sports-II 60 15 75 (Volleyball Game and Yoga)

Practical (Volleyball and Game and Yoga) 50

Total Marks: 625

Grant Total: 1100

42(9) B.Sc (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) (Six semester course)

SEMESTER-I Paper-I English (Compulsory) Theory- 60 Marks Int. Assessment: 15 Time: Three hours

Note: The paper will set the question paper as per the syllabus and according the standard of the course.

A Book of English for Polytechnics By Mrs. Anju (M.A..M.Phil) Lect. Govt. Polytechnic, Ambala City (Ishan Publiscation), 2765,/2, Patel Road, Ambala City. Ph. 0171-244997

Following six chapters from the above book. (15 Marks) 1. Adventure in Space 2. An Engineering Wizard 3. The Diamond Necklace 4. Gold lives in the Punch 5. The man who found penicillin 6. Guru Nanak Dev (One general question with internal choice) 2. Comprehension – from the text book. (15 Marks) 3. Grammer (15 Marks) a) Voice b) Nattation c) Tenses d) Prepositions e) Punctuation

4. Translation from English to Hindi (08 Marks) 5. Paragraph on Topic/ themes related to games and sports. (07 Marks)

42(10) SYLLABUS

B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) - I

Paper – II Hindi (Compulsory) Time 3 hours Theory 60 Int. Assessment 15 Note: The paper setter will set the question paper as per syllabus and according the standard of the course.

SEMESTER – I

1- ^i`Fohjkjt dh vk¡[ksa* ,dkadh ------25 vad (MkW0 jkedqekj oekZ) izLrqr ,dkadh esa ls nks x|ka'k fn, tk,¡xs] ftuesa ls ,d dh lizlax O;k[;k fy[kuh gksxhA blds fy, 15 vad fu/kkZfjr gSaA

blh ,dkadh essa ls pfj=&fp=.k] mís';] rkfRod leh{kk vkfn ij iwNs x, nks iz'uksa esa ls ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxk tks 10 vad dk gksxkA

2- okD;ka'k ds fy, ,d 'kCn 10 vad (fn, x, okD;ksa@okD;ka'kksa esa ls fdUgha nl ds fy, ,d&,d 'kCn fy[kuk gksxkA izR;sd ds fy, ,d vad fu/kZfjr gSA) 3- i;kZ;okph 'kCn 05 vad 4- okD; & 'kks/ku 05 vad (i;kZ;okph 'kCn ,oa okD;& 'kks/ku ds iz'u cgqfodYih gksaxsA fn, x, pkj&pkj fodYiksa esa

ls lgh fodYi dk p;u dj ijh{kkFkhZ dks viuh mÙkj iqfLrdk esa fy[kuk gksxkA izR;sd

Hkkx ds fy, ,d vad fu/kZfjr gS)

42(11) 5- fuca/k ys[ku 15 vad (jktuhfrd] lkekftd] lkaLd`frd] le&lkef;d vkfn fo"k;ksa ij fn, x, ikap fuca/kksa esa ls ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA)

42(12) B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) (Semester-I) Paper – III Foundation of Physical Education and Sports

Time: Three hours Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

Note: The question paper will consist of five Unit I,II,III,IV,& V, UnitI,II,III,&IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 15 marks each. Unit ‘Vth’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Meaning, Importance of Physical Education Need of Physical Education Scope of Physical Education and Sports Relation of Physical Education to General Education and Recreation.

Unit - II Aim and Objectives of Physical Education and Sports Physical, Mental, Social, Emotional Developments, Neuro Muscular Co-ordination, Development of Good Citizenship, Worthy Use of Leisure time.

Unit – III A Brief Historical Review of Physical Education and Sports Activities of Indian Heritage, History of Asian and Modern Olympic Games, History of Phy.Edu. of Greace.

UNIT – IV National Programme of Physical Education and Sports National Institutes of Physical Education & Sports Sports Talent Search Scholarship

References 1. Khan, E.A, History of Phy.Edu;Patna Scientific Corporation (1964). 2. Kamlesh, M.L.Physical Education Facts and Foundation; Faridabad P.S publication(pvt) Ltd.(1988). 3. Kamlesh, M.L.Principles& History of Phy.Edu., Prakash Bros., Patiala,1991. 4. Hoffman,G.J.&Harris J.C Introducation to Knesiology studying Phy.Activity,2000. 5. Revenas, R.S.(1978) Foundations of Physical Education. 6. Barrow, R.M.(1983) Man and Movement. 7. Bucher, G.A(1922)Foundation of Phy.Edu.and Sports.

42(13) (Semester-I) Paper – IV Anatomy & Physiology

Time: Three hours Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Concept of Anatomy & Physiology and their implications. Description of Cell, tissue, Structure and functions of the Cell Properties of living Cell.

Unit - II Structure and Functions of Skelton System Bones- composition, Classification and Function of Bones Features of Different Bones of the Body i.e. Scapula, Radius, Ulna, Humorous, Hip Bone, Femur, Tibia, Ribs and Bones of the Skull.

Joints – Definition and Classification of Joints, Structure of a Synovial Joints.

Unit – III Planes & Axis of Movements and Terminology of Movement around the Joints. Respiratory System . Structure of Lungs. Mechanism of Respiration. Second wind and Oxygen Debt. Unit - IV i) Cardiovascular System : Structure of Heart and Major Blood Vessels in different Part of the Body. Process of blood circulation in the body. ii) Excretory System : Structure of Kidney and Urinary Tract. Various Channels of Excretion such as Kidney, Skin and Rectum.

Reference Books. 1. Pearee Evelyn, C Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses, London, Faber and Faber Ltd.,1962

2. Pavat.J Anatomy for Students and Teachers of Physical Education, London, Edward Arnold and Co., 1959.

3. Willion. J.F Anatomy and Physiology, London, W.B.Saunders. 42(14) 4. Senson Wright Applied Physiology

5. Best and Taylor The Living Body, New Delhi, Asia Club House,1960.

6. Smount, C.F.V.and Physiotherapy, Occupational, McDonald, RJ.S Therapy and Gymnastics, Edward Arnold Pvt.Ltd., 1969. 7. Kiober Grcy Anatomy and Physiology.

8. Stackpoles Anatomy and Physiology (6th ed.).

42(15) B.Sc. ( Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) (Semester-I) Paper – V Theory of Games & Sports -I (Athletics and Gymnastics) Time: Three hours Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit - I

Sprints:- a) Correct Running Style Emphasis on Proper Body Position b) Crouch Start – Fixing of Starting Blocks, Getting off the Block c) Practice of Starts with Blocks using Proper Command d) Curve Running e) Walking

Unit - II High Jump:- a) Approach run b) Take Off c) Flying Phase (Stadel Technique & Fosburry Flop)

Note : Fosburry Flop is only Taught if Proper Facility available.

Unit - III History of Gymnastics in India, Asia and World

The measurements and the layout of various apparatuses of Gymnastics

Unit - IV For Boys For Girls

1. Floor Exercises 1. Floor Exercises a) Forward Roll a) Roll Forward b) Backward Roll b) Roll Backward c) Handstand Roll Forward c) Handstand Roll Forward d) Cart Wheel d) Cart Wheel e) Roll Backward to Handstand e) Cat Leap Jump f) Front Split f) Handstand Forward g) Scale Balance

42(16) 2. Parallel Bar 2. Balancing Beam a) Upper Arm Sport a) Jump to Squat Stand b) Back Uprise From Upper Arm b) Knee Scale with support c) Perfect Swing on Parallel Bar c) Walking on the Beam d) Sitting Position Straddle d) Standing Scale front ways e) Shoulder Stand e) Cat Leap f) Front Wall Dismount

3. Horizontal Bar a) Perfect Swing on Horizontal Bar b) Single Leg upstart (with swing) c) Single leg Circle Forward d) Single Leg Circle Backward e) Under Swing Dismount

REFERENCES: 1. Chauhan, B.S.,Khel Jagat Mein Athletics, Jalandhar: A.P.Pub.,1999. 2. Fox,E.L., Physiological Basis of Physical Education and Athletics, Brown Pub.,1989. 3. Gothi, Ekta, Teaching and Coaching Athletics, ND: Sports Pub.1997. 4. Anand, Om Parkash., Yoga Dawara Kaya Kalp, Kanpur, Sewasth Sahitya Perkashan,2001. 5. Code of Points Trampoline Gymnastics, Federation Int. De Gymnasics,2005. 6. Federation International Gymnastics, Federtion Int. De Gymnasics,2006. 7. Jain, R,Play and Learn Gymnastics, Khel Sahitaya Kendra,2005. 8. Pearson, D.Play The Game Gymnastics, Britain : Ward Lock, 1991.

42(17) (Semester-I) Theory of Games & Sports - II Paper-VI (Volleyball Games and Yoga) Time: Three hours Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The question paper will consist of five Units I,II,III,IV,& V, Unit I,II,III,& IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘Vth’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all. SEMESTER – I Unit - I 1. History of Volleyball in India & Asia 2. Court – Dimensions, Officials of Volleyball 3. Warming up – General & Specific Unit - II 1. Techniques :- a) Service – Under Arm, Side Arm, Overhead & Floating b) Pass – The Volley, The dig c) Player’s Stance – Receiving the ball and Passing the Teamates Unit - III 1. Meaning Definition of Yoga, Types of Yoga 2. Pranayama & Its techniques 3. Asanas – Meaning and Types of Asanas Unit - IV 4. Importance of Yoga in Daily Life 5. Techniques & benefits of following Asanas :- a) Padmasana b) Vajrasana c) Halasana d) Vakrasana e) Sarvangasana f) Vipritkarani g) Bhujangasana h) Surya Namaskar

REFERENCES 1. Anand, Om Prakash. Yog Dawra Kay Kalo, Kanpur, Sewasth Sahity Perkashan,2001. 2. Sarin, N.Yoga Dawara Ragoon Ka Upchhar, Khel ahitya Kendra,2003. 3. Sri., Swami Rama, Breathing, Rishikesh, Sadhana Mandir Trust,2001. 4. Swami, Ram.,Yoga & Married life, Rishikesh Sadhana Mandir Trust,2000. 5. Swami, Veda Bharti., Yoga Polity, Economy and family, Rishikesh Sadhana Mandir Trust,2000. 6. American Program, Coaching Youth Volly Ball, Campaigon, H.K.,1996 7. FIVB, Backcourt Spiking in Modern Volly Ball, Chennai: FIVB,1996. 8. Saggar,S.K., Cosco Skill Stactics-Volley Ball, Delhi: Sports Publication,1994. 9. Scates,A.E.,Winning Volley Ball, WC Brown, 1993. 42(18)

SEMESTER-II B.Sc (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) (Six semester course) Paper-I English (Compulsory) Time: Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note : The paper will set the question paper as per the syllabus and according the standard of the course.

A Book of English for Polytechnics

By Mrs. Anju (M.A..M.Phil) Lect. Govt. Polytechnic, Ambala City (Ishan Publiscation), 2765,/2, Patel Road, Ambala City. Ph. 0171-244997

Following six chapters from the above book. 1. Uncle Podger Hangs a Picture 2. Subhash Chander Bose 3. A pair of Mustachias 4. Guru Gobind Singh 5. With Photographer 6. Sir Jagdish Chander Bose One general question with internal choice (15 Marks)

2. Comprehension (10 Marks) 3. Letter Writing (Business) (15 Marks) 4. Idioms and Phrases / Autonyms/ Snony (10 Marks) 5. Translation from Hindi to English (10 Marks)

42(19) Paper – II Hindi (Compulsory) B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) - I

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15 Note: The paper setter will set the question paper as per syllabus and according the standard of the course.

SEMESTER – II

1- dgkuh % (i) dQu (izsepan) (ii) cw<+h dkdh (izsepan) 25 vad izLrqr dgkfu;ksa esa ls nks x|ka'k fn, tk,¡xs] ftuesa ls ,d dh lizlax O;k[;k fy[kuh gksxhA blds fy, 10 vad fu/kZfjr gSa

bUgha dgkfu;ksa esa ls pfj= fp=.k] mís';] rkfRod leh{kk] dF;] leL;kvksa vkfn ij iwNs x, nks leh{kkRed iz'uksa esa ls ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxk] tks 10 vad dk gksxkA

2- [ksy lEca/h ikfjHkkf"kd 'kCnkoyh 10 vad iwoZ ikB~;Øe esa fn, x, 150 ds yxHkx 'kCn fu/kZfjr gSa] ftuesa ls 15 'kCn (vaxzsth ds) fn, tk,¡xsA buesa ls fdUgha nl ds fgUnh i;kZ; fy[kus gksaxsA izR;sd ds fy, ,d vad fu/kZfjr gSaA 3- eqgkojs 5 vad 4- yksdksfDr;k¡ 5 vad 5- foijhrkFkZd (foykse) 'kCn 5 vad 6- 'kCn&'kks/ku 5 vad (foijhrkFkZd 'kCn ,oa 'kCn&'kks/u ds iz'u cgqfodYih gksaxsA izR;sd ds fy, pkj&pkj fodYi fn, tk;saxsA lgh fodYi dk p;u dj ijh{kkFkhZ dks viuh mÙkj&iqfLrdk esa fy[kuk gksxkA izR;sd ds fy, ,d vad fu/kZfjr gSA) 7- i=&ys[ku (f'kdk;rh ,oa lEiknd ds uke) 10 vad fn, x, nks i=ksa esa ls ,d dk mÙkj visf{kr gksxkA 42(20) 42(21) (Semester-II) Paper – III Foundation of Physical Education and Sports

Time: Three hours Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

Note: The question paper will consist of five UnitsI,II,III,IV,& V, UnitI,II,III,&IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 15 marks each. Unit ‘Vth’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each.

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Scientific basis of Physical Education and Sports, Contribution of Allied Sciences – Anatomy, Physiology, Kinesiology, Psychology, Sociology, Biomechanics & Anthropometry

Unit – II N.C.C., N.S.S., N.S.U., Scouting & Guiding, Youth Hostels, Youth Festivals Nehru Yuva Kendras

Unit – III Coaching Schemes, Rural Sports, Women Sports National Fitness Programme National Awards & Honours to Outstanding Sportspersons and Coaches

Unit – IV Olympic Movement and its Impact on Physical Education and Sports The contribution of Olympic Movement towards International Understanding

REFERENCES 1. Khan, E.A, History of Phy.Edu; Patna Scientific Corporation (1964). 2. Kamlesh, M.L.Physical Education Facts and Foundations; Faridabad P.S.publication (pvt) Ltd. (1988). 3. Kamlesh, M.L.Principles & History of Phy.Edu., Prakash Bros., Patiala,1991. 4. Hoffman, G.J & Harris J.C Introduction to Knesiology studying Phy. Activity,2000. 5. Revenas, R.S (1978) Foundations of Physical Education. 6. Barrow, R.M.(1983) Man and Moment. 7. Bucher, G.A.(1992) Foundations of Phy.Edu. And Sports.

42(22) (Semester-II) Paper – IV Anatomy & Physiology (Theory)

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit – 1 Muscular System:- Structural & Functional Classification of Muscles Significance & Characteristics of Muscles Relation of Muscle & Bone Coverage

Unit – II

Digestive System :- Structure & Function of Various Parts. Movement of Gastro Intenstinal Tract. Secretion and Functions of Digestive Juices. Function of Liver and Absorption of Food.

Unit – III Nervous System :- a) Structure of Brain and Spinal Cord b) Function of Important Parts of Nervous System (Spinal Cord, Cerebrum, Cerebellum, Medulla Oblongata) Autonomic Nervous System Central Nervous System

Unit – IV Structure of Eye Organs for Vision. Structure and Function of Skin. Structure and Function of Ear

42(23) PRACTICAL 50 Marks

SEMESTER – II

1. Heart Sound & Measurement of blood pressure. 2. Determination of Blood Groups 3. Breathe Sound 4. Determination of Vital Capacity 5. Breathe Holding Time 6. Dissection of Goat’s Heart 7 Estimation of Haemoglobin 8. Body Temperature 9. Normal Pulse Rate 10 Movement Time

Reference Books. 1. Pearee Evelyn, C Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses, London, Faber and Faber Ltd.,1962

2. Pavat.J Anatomy for Students and Teachers of Physical Education, London, Edward Arnold and Co., 1959.

3. Willion. J.F Anatomy and Physiology, London, W.B.Saunders.

4. Senson Wright Applied Physiology

5. Best and Taylor The Living Body, New Delhi, Asia Club House,1960.

6. Smount, C.F.V.and Physiotherapy, Occupational, McDonald, RJ.S Therapy and Gymnastics, Edward Arnold Pvt.Ltd., 1969. 7. Kiober Grcy Anatomy and Physiology.

8. Stackpoles Anatomy and Physiology (6th ed.).

42(24) B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports) (Semester-II) Paper – V Theory of Games & Sports -I (Track & Field and Gymnastics) Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit - I 1. Middle Distance Running :- a) Correct Running Style emphasis on Proper Body Position and Foot Placement b) Practice of Standing Start

2. Long Jump a) Approach run b) Take off c) Flying Phase (Hang & running in the Air Styles) d) Landing

Unit - II 3 Shot Put a) Holding b) Placement of Shot c) Initial Stance d) Glide e) Delivery Stance f) Delivery action g) Reverse

Unit - III 1. General Development Exercises with & without Apparatus 2. Duties of Judges and Superior Judges on the various apparatuses 3. Rules related to the various apparatuses and exercises

Unit - IV For Boys For Girls

1. Vaulting Table 1. Vaulting Table b) Cat Vault a) Cat Vault c) Straddle Vault b) Straddle Vault 2. Pommel Horse 2. Uneven Bars 42(25) a) Perfect support Position on Pommel Horse a) Hang higher bar to Squat b) Half Single Leg Circle forward to rear support c) Single Leg Circle Outward (Front support) b) Swing d) Single Leg Circle Inward (Front Support) c) One leg squat rise to scale d) Underswing Dismount 3. Roman Rings:- a) Perfect Swing on Roman Ring b) Inverted Hang c) L hang d) Indicate forward with Bend Body e) Indicate Forward with Straight Body

PRACTICAL 50 Marks SEMESTER – II Part – A Track & Field : 25 Marks (a) Spirits (b) Distance running (c) Jumps (High jump, long jump & Pole vault) (d) Throws- short-put javlin discuss Two events of the following will be assessed for examination.

Part – B Gymnastics : 25 Marks

For Boys For Girls

1. Vaulting Table:- 1. Vaulting Table:- a) Cat Vault a) Cat Vault b)Straddle Vault b) Straddle Vault

2. Pommel Horse:- 2. Uneven Bars:- a) Perfect support Position on Pommel Horse a) Hang higher bar to Squat b)Half Single Leg Circle forward to rear support c)Single Leg Circle Outward (Front support) b) Swing d)Single Leg Circle Inward (Front Support) c) One leg squat rise to scale d) Under swing Dismount 3. Roman Rings :- a) Perfect Swing on Roman Ring b) Inverted Hang c) L hang d)Indicate forward with Bend Body e)Indicate Forward with Straight Body

42(26) REFERENCES

1. Chauhan, B.S., Khel Jagat Mein Athletics, Jalandhar: A.P.pub.,1999. 2. Fox, E.L.,Physiological Basis of Physical Education and Athletics,Brown Pub.,1989. 3. Gothi, Ekta, Teaching and Coaching Athletics, N.D: Sports Pub.1997. 4. Anand, Om Parkash., Yoga Dawara Kaya Kalp, Kanpur, Sewasth Sahitya Perkashan,2001. 5. Code of Points Trampoline Gymnastics, Federation Int. De Gymnasics,2005. 6. Federation International Gymnastics, Federation Int. De. Gymnasics,2006. 7. Jain, R,Play and Learn Gymnastics, Khel Sahitaya Kendra, 2005. 8. Pearson, D.Play The Game Gymnastics, Britain : Ward Lock,1991

42(27) (Semester-II)

Theory of Games & Sports - II Paper-VI (Volleyball Games and Yoga)

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘Vth.’ is compulsory for all.

Unit - I 1. Duties of officials before, during and after the competition. 2. Organization of Tournament at district, state, Intramural & Inter college level Unit - II 1. Techniques of Volleyball:- a) Footwork b) Spiking – Straight arm, Round Arm, c) Blocking – Individual & Group d) Dives & Rolls

2. Tactics:- a) Individual & Group Tactics b) Tactics of Offence c) Tactics of Defense Unit - III 1. Shat Karma – Techniques & Importance 2. Asthang Yoga – Yama, Niyam, Asana, Pranayama, Pratihara, Dharana, Dhyan and Samadhi 3. Difference between Yogic & Non-yogic System of Exercise. Unit - IV 1. Importance of Asanas 2. Techniques & Benefits of Following Asanas a) Tadasana b) Vrikshasana c) Spiritkarani d) Bakasana e) Ardhmastenderasana f) Matsyasana g) Janusirasana

3. Jal Neti / Sutra Neti, Kapalbhati 4. One technique of Pranayama

42(28) PRACTICAL 50 Marks SEMESTER – II

Part –A Volleyball Games : 25 Marks

1. General and Specific Warming up 2. Techniques a) Service – Under Arm, Side Arm, Overhead & Floating b) Pass – The Volley, The dig c) Player’s Stance – Receiving the ball and Passing the Teamates

Part – B Yoga : 25 Marks

1. Techniques of following Asanas :- a) Padmasana b) Vajrasana c) Halasana d) Vakrasana e) Sarvangasana f) Vipritkarani g) Bhujangasana h) Surya Namaskar 2. Jal Neti / Sutra Neti, Kapalbhati 3. One technique of Pranayama

REFERENCES 1. Anand, Om Prakash. Yog Dawra Kay Kalo, Kanpur, Sewasth Sahity Perkashan,2001. 2.Sarin, N.,Yoga Dawara Ragoon Ka Upchhar, Khel ahitya Kendra,2003. 3.Sri., Swami Rama, Breathing, Rishikesh,Sadhana Mandir Trust,2001. 4. Swami, Ram., Yoga & Married Like, Rishikehs Sadhana Mandir Trust,2000. 5. Swami, Veda Bharti., Yoga Polity, Economy and family, Rishikesh Sadhana Mandir Trust,2000. 6.American Program, Coaching Youth Volly Ball, Campaigon, H.K.,1996. 7. FIVB, Backcourt Spiking in modern Volly Ball,Chennai:FIVB,1996. 8. Saggar, S.K., Cosco Skills Stactics- Volley Ball, Delhi: Sports Publication,1994. 9. Scates, A.E.Winning Volley Ball, WC Brown,1993.

42(29) Scheme of Examination for B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports). Six Semester Course.

IIIrd. Semester

Theory Marks Int. Assessment Total Marks

Paper-Ist. English 60 15 75

Paper-IInd. Health and Safety Education 60 15 75 Paper-IIIrd. Physiology of Exercise 60 15 75

Paper-IVth. Theory of Games (Athletics and Gymnastic) 60 15 75

Paper Vth. Theory of Games /Sports (Basketball)& 60 15 75 Vocational Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) ______

Total Marks 375 .

IVth. Semester

Paper- I English 60 15 75

Paper-II First aid and Rehabilitation (Theory) 60 15 75

(Practical) 50

Paper-III Physiology of Exercise (Theory) 60 15 75

(Practical) 50

Paper-IVth. Theory of Games (Athletics 60 15 75 and Gymnastics) (Theory)

(Practical) (Athletics and Gymnastic) (25+25) 50

Paper-Vth. Theory of Games /Sports (Basketball)& 60 15 75

Vocational Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) (Theory)

(Practical) a) Basketball b) Physiotherapy (25+25) 50

______

Total Marks 575 .

Grant Total 375+ 575=950

42(30) SYLLABUS

B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-I (ENGLISH) Semester-III Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The paper setter will set the question as per the syllabus and according the standard

of the course.

Books : English through Reading

1. Following three chapters from the above written book. (15 Marks)

I. Civilization and history

II. The Fun they had

III. Oil

(One general question with internal choice)

2. Comprehension – from above mentioned chapters of text book (10 Marks)

3. Grammer from above mentioned chapters of text book. (15 Marks)

a) Articles b) Voice c) Narration d) Prepositions e) Tenses 4. Translation from Hindi to English (10 Marks)

5. Essay writing related to games and sports (10 Marks)

42(31) SYLLABUS B.Sc.(Physical Education, Health Education &Sports) PAPER-II (HEALTH AND SAFETY EDUCATION) Semester-III

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

UNIT-I • Meaning of Health. Relationship of physical mental emotion &social health with each other • Importance of health for individual, family, community and Nation • Meaning of Health Education. Its needs, scope ,aim & objectives • Principles of health education and Programme for health education

UNIT- II

• World health Organization and other voluntary Agencies • Effort to reduce ill effect of environment on health • Health Problems of college students, use of leisure time , recreation and traveling • Meaning and importance of personal hygiene, care of skin, eyes, ears, nose, feet hands and hairs.

UNIT-III

• Meaning of importance of safety education • Prevention of accidents. • Needs of safety education in physical education & sports. • Safe environment health careers available in India

UNIT-IV • Principles of safety with respect of building & play fields. • Equipments, dress etc. safety in water , • Safety during floods, hurricane. Thunder lighting, air raids , • Safety of roads , camps, picnics & tours

42(32) Books recommended for further study:

• Bauer,W.W(Editor) Today’ Health Guide,American,Medical Association,Revised Edition 1968. • Harg jossie Helen,SchoolHealth Programme New York,Holt Reinehart Nad Winston,Inc,1965. • Ariderson,CL school Health Practice.,ed.4,saint laduies, the C.V. Maby Com,.1968 • Health Education by Moss and other ( National Education on Association at UTA) • Turner et al:school Health Education, Harper st. louis , The V.C Mosby Co. 1976. • Hamir A : The school Education , Harper and Brother Newyork, 1965. • Oberteutfar D: School Education Harper and Brother New York, Latest edition, 1972

42(33) B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-III (PHYSIOLOGY OF EXERCISE) Semester-III Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV & V, Unit I, II, III, & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘V’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I, II, III, & IV and Unit ‘V.’ is compulsory for all.

UNIT-I

• Meaning of Physiology of Exercise.

• Importance of Physiology of Exercise in the field of Physical Education & Sports.

• Nature of Physiology of Exercise.

UNIT-II

• Meaning and types of exercise.

• Effects of exercise on muscular system.

• Effects of exercise on respiratory system .

• Effects of exercise on cardio-vascular system

UNIT –III

• Muscles and types of muscles.

• Properties of voluntary muscles.

• Functions of voluntary muscles.

• Conditions affecting muscular contraction.

UNIT-IV

• Definition of Physical Fitness.

42(34) • Components of Physical Fitness.

• Benefits of Physical Fitness.

• Factors influencing Physical Fitness.

Books recommended for further study:

• Devies,H.A. Physiology of exercise for Physical Education and Athletes’ London:Staples Press,1979

• Lal,D.C. ‘Hand book of Exercise Physiology’New Delhi:Sports Publication:2006

• Tiwari,Sandhya ‘exercise physiology’ Physiology’New Delhi:Sports Publication:2009

• Singh,Ajmer et.al.’Essentials of Physical Education’New Delhi:Kalyani Publication:2003

• Srivastava et.al. ‘Text book of Practical physiology’ Kolcutta:Scientific book agency.1976

• Chatterjee,C.C. ‘Human Physiology’New Delhi:Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,1973

• Macey,Robert I. ‘Human Physiology’New Delhi:Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,1973

42(35) B.Sc.(Physical Education, Health Education &Sports)

PAPER-IV THEORY OF GAMES (ATHLETICS AND GYMNASTICS) Semester-III

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit -1

• Marking of Standard Track • Distribution of Staggers • Marking of Acceleration and Exchange’s Zone in relay races. • Style of Baton Exchange (Visual and Non Visual) in relay races. • Fixing up Runners for Different relay races • General rules of the competition

Unit-II

• Marking and complete measurement of landing Pit and runway of triple jump • General rule of the competition • Teaching of different stages / phases of triple jump a) Approach Run b). Take off. For hop, Step, Jump and Landing of Hop& Step c). Flying Phases d). Landing • Preparation of Score Sheet

Unit –III

• Definition of Gymnastics and kinds of Gymnastics • Various safety measure used in Gymnastics. • Measurement and Diagram of various apparatuses of Gymnastics • General rules of the competition

Unit –IV

Techniques of exercises on Gymnastics Apparatuses

For Boys For Girls

42(36) Floor Exercises Floor Exercises

1. Stand Scale front ways ,Side ways 1.Front Split 2. Jump forward to roll Forward(Dive roll) 2. Side Scale 3. Round off 3. Hand Stand to Bridge 4. Head spring 4. Roll backward to hand Stand 5. Hand spring 5. Back walk -Over 6. Hand Spring

Parallel Bar Balancing Beam

• Front Upraise to hand Support 1. Jump to squat stand with one leg (Right or Left) • “L” Support 2. Scissor Lead Jump • Roll backward on Upper arms 3. “V” Balance • Roll Forward on Upper arms 4. Roll Forward • Swing to Hand stand 5. Standing scale Sideways

Horizontal Bar

• Single leg up- Start (with Straight Leg • Sole Circle Forward(leg Bent) • Hip Circle Backward • Front hip Circle • Straddle Dismount

Books recommended for further study: ATHLETICS: Varghese,Sandhu ‘Teaching and Coaching of Athletics’, Sports Publication,New Delhi,2006 Vidyasagar,’Training Systematics in throwing’ NIS Publication,Patiala,1979 Narang,P.’athletic Training’p.Narang;Lakshay Publication New Delhi 2005 Syal,Meenu, ‘Teach yourself Sprinting’ Prena Publication,Delhi,2004 Balayan.D. ‘play and learn thowing’ Khel sahitya Kendra,New Delhi,2008 Arrora,Monika ‘Athletics –Coaching Manual’ Sports Publication,New Delhi,2005 -Sharma,O.P. ‘Athletics- Skill & Rules. Khel sahitya Kendra,New Delhi,2003

GYMNASTICS: Cooper,Phyllis AND Trnka,Milan’ Teaching gymnastics skills to men and women’Surjeet Publication,Delhi,1982 Bawa, Gurdial Singh ‘Fundamentals of men’s Gymnastics’Friends Publications(India) Delhi,1994

42(37) Brown ,James R. and Wardell David B. ‘Teaching and Coaching Gymnastics for men and WOMEN’ john wiley and SONS,New York,1980 Madak Pinto ‘Coaching Gymnastics’ Khel sahitya Kendra,New Delhi,2000. Thani lokesh ‘Skills and Tactics-Gymnastics, Sports publication ,New Delhi,1995. Nagi Kunal ‘Teach Yourself Men Gymnastics’ Sports publication ,New Delhi,2007 Nagi Kunal ‘Teach Yourself Women Gymnastics’ Sports publication ,New Delhi,2007 Thani Lokesh ‘Gymnastics’ Sports publication ,New Delhi,2000

42(38) B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-V

[THEORY OF GAMES/SPORTS(BASKETBALL) & VOCATIONAL ORIENTED COURSE(PHYSIOTHERAPY)]

Semester-III

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

UNIT-I

• History of Basket Ball : a) In India (b) In Asia (c) In World

• Organisation of Basket Ball : Working Federation of Basket Ball at District Level State Level, National Level and International Level

• Warming Up: Meaning, Definition, Importance Of Warming up

• Principles of Warming Up, training load

UNIT- II

• Cooling Down : Its meaning and Importance

• Layout and Maintenance of Basket Ball Play field

• Equipment of Basketball and their specifications

• Sports awards and personalities of Basket Ball

UNIT III

• Meaning and definition, objectives and importance of Physiotherapy

• Guiding Principles of Physiotherapy

• Electro Therapy: Meaning, sources of direct current, effects of direct current

• Actinotherapy: Meaning of Infrared rays, Ultra-violent rays , their sources effects and techniques

• Hydrotherapy: Meaning of Hydrotherapy and Cryotherapy, techniques and benefits of wax bath, 42(39) contrast bath and whirlpool bath

UNIT IV

• Massage Therapy: Meaning, Definition and history of massage

• Physiological Effects of general massage on circulatory and respiratory systems.

• Exercise therapy : Meaning of exercise therapy

• Fundamental Position: Lying position , sitting position, standing position, kneeling position and hanging position with uses and modifications

Books recommended for further study:

BASKETBALL:

Coleman and Ray,’Basketball’ An official E.B.B.A. Publication, West Yorkshire,1976.

Pruitt,Jim ‘Play Better Basketball’ Matchplay Books,Wiltshire,1982.

Jain,Renu ‘Teach yourself basketball’Prena Publication,Delhi,2004

Sharma,O.P. ‘Basketball –skill &rules’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2003.

Sharma,J.P. ‘ Skills& Techniques –Basketball ’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2008.

PHYSIOTHERAPY:

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’,Henery Ling Ltd.The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’khel sahitya kendra,new delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996

Thomson,Ann,Skinner & Piercy,Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House,New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee,New York,1986.

42(40) B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-I (ENGLISH) Semester-IV Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The paper setter will set the question as per the syllabus and according the standard of the course.

Books : English Through Reading

1. Following four chapters from the above written book (15 Marks)

I. An observation and an explanation

II. A wrong man in worker’s paradise

III. Making surgery safe

IV. Using hand wisely

2. Comprehension : From above mentioned chapters of text book (15 Marks)

3. Grammar from above mentioned chapters of text book (10 Marks)

a) Articles b) Voice c) Narration d) Prepositions e) Tenses 4. Translation from Hindi to English (10 Marks)

5. Letter writing (Official) (10 Marks)

42(41) B.Sc.(Physical Education, Health Education &Sports)

PAPER-II

(FIRST AID AND REHABILITATION) Semester-IV Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

UNIT-I

• Meaning scope aim and objectives of first aid • Importance of first aid in physical education and sports • Types of First Aid • First aid box and its articles.

UNIT-II

• Causes of sports injuries • Principles of First Aid • Qualities and functions of First Aider • First Aid and emergency treatment of various cases-drowning, dislocation, fracture, burns, electric shock, snake bite& poison

UNIT-III

• Rehabilitation procedures of sport injuries. • Principles of Rehabilitation of injuries and Exercises for rehabilitation • Balanced diet and its constitutents • Massage and its types

UNIT-IV

• Meaning and types of Disability. • Causes of Disability. • Problems of the Disabled persons • Preventive measures of Disability

42(42) PRACTICAL 50 MARKS

• FIRST AID AND EMERGENCY TREATMENT OF FOLLOWING CASES- a)drowning, b)dislocation, c)fracture, d)burns, e)electric shock, f)snake bite g) poison

• TYPES OF BANDAGES • ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION • FIRST AID BOX • TRANSPORTATION OF INJURED PERSONS • PRACTICAL NOTE BOOK AND VIVA

Books recommended for further study:

1. Armstrong and Tuckler; Injuries in sports, London, Staples Press, 1964 2. Bolan J.P : Treatment and prevention of Athletic injuries. 3. Rasch, P.J inters state printer and publisher, 1967. 4. Morehouse, L.E and Rasch, P.J; Sports medicine for Trainers, Philadelphia 5. W.B Saunder Co., 1963. 6. Ryans Allan : Medical Care of the Athlete, McGraw Hill. 7. Morehouse : Physiology of exercise 8. Falls : Exercise Physiology 9. Karpovich : Physiology of Muscular activity 10. Pande, P.K.”Know how sports medicine?”AP Publication, Jalandhar. 11. Safety at school (Education Pump let Number -53) London :Her Majesty ‘s Stationary Office 1969 12. School Safety Policies –Washington L.C American Association For Health, Physical Education and Recreation 13. Stack, Harbert J,DukeElkow Education for safe Living:: Englawood Cliff, New Jersey , Prentice Hall Inc,1966 14. Florio, A.& Stafford G.T-safety Education New York, Mc Graw Hill Book Com.1967 15. Evans, A William Everyday safety, Chicago :Iyon and Camaha

42(43) B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-III (PHYSIOLOGY OF EXERCISE) Semester-IV Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV& V, UnitI,II,III,&IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘V’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I,II,III,& IV and Unit ‘V.’ is compulsory for all.

UNIT-I

• Effect of exercise on excretory system.

• Effect of exercise on metabolic processes.

• Effect of exercise on endocrine system.

UNIT-II

• Structure of voluntary muscle.

• Structural classification of muscles.

• Nervous control of muscular contraction.

• Energy for muscular work.

UNIT-III

• Physiological concept of Speed.

• Physiological concept of Strength.

• Physiological concept of Endurance.

• Physiological concept of Agility.

UNIT-IV

• Physiological concept of Vital capacity, Second Wind& Oxygen Debt.

• Physiological concept of Fatigue.

• Physiological basis of Warming up. 42(44) • Environmental factors affecting sports performance.

PRACTICAL 50 marks

• To listen the breadth sound by means of stethoscope.

• To listen the heart sound by means of stethoscope.

• To study the effect of exercise on pulse.

• Harvard step test of cardio-vascular endurance.

• To measure the vital capacity.

• To measure the ability to react and move quickly and accurately(Nelson choice response

movement test).

• To test the vision by Snells vision chart.

• To test the colour vision by Ischihara colour vision charts.

Books recommended for further study:

• Devies,H.A. Physiology of exercise for Physical Education and Athletes’ London:Staples Press,1979

• Lal,D.C. ‘Hand book of Exercise Physiology’New Delhi:Sports Publication:2006

• Tiwari,Sandhya ‘exercise physiology’ Physiology’New Delhi:Sports Publication:2009

• Singh,Ajmer et.al.’Essentials of Physical Education’New Delhi:Kalyani Publication:2003

• Srivastava et.al. ‘Text book of Practical physiology’ Kolcutta:Scientific book agency.1976

• Chatterjee,C.C. ‘Human Physiology’New Delhi:Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,1973

• Macey,Robert I. ‘Human Physiology’New Delhi:Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,1973

42(45) B.Sc.(Physical Education, Health Education &Sports) PAPER-IV THEORY OF GAMES (ATHLETICS AND GYMNASTICS)

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit -1 • Marking and Specific measurement of throwing sector and discus • General Rule of Discus throw Competition • Teaching of Different stages of Discus throw

1. Holding 2. Initial stance 3. Preliminary swings 4. Turns 5. Delivery action 6. Reverse

• Score Sheet of Discus Throw

Unit -II • Correct running Style emphasizing on proper body position and foot placement in long distance races • Proper Leg and arm Action in long distance races • Running Tactics in long distance races • Detailed list of officials and their duties of the Athletics Meet

Unit –III

• Organization of Gymnastics Competition, Types of Competition and Method of Scoring. • Define Gymnasium Hall, Size, and Facilities to be provide in a Gymnasium hall. • Measurement and Diagrams of Following apparatuses of Gymnastics. • Vaulting Table • Pommel Horse/Un- Even Parallel Bar • Roman Ring

Unit –IV

42(46) Technique of exercises on Gymnastics Apparatuses

For Boys For Girls Vaulting table Vaulting table

1 . Jump to Straddle Stand 1. Jump to Straddle Stand 2 . Squat Vault 2. Squat Vault

Pommel Un- Even Parallel Bar

1. Jump to Front Support 1.Jump to Front Support 2. Single Leg Circle Outward(From Un- even Support ) 2. Squat Through with one leg backward 3. Scissor Forward 3. Single Leg Circle forward 4. Both Leg Circle 4. Single Leg Circle backward 5. Single leg Dismount forward 5. Free Hip Circle backward 6.Under Swing dismount over the low bar Roman Ring

1. Hanging scale rear ways. 2. Up- Start 3. “L” Support on Roman ring 4. Shoulder Stand 5. Dislocation

PRACTICAL 50 MARKS(25+25)

1. ATHLETICS 25 MARKS

RELAY RACES: • Style of Baton Exchange (Visual and Non Visual) in relay races. • Fixing up Runner for Different relay races • General rules of the competition TRIPLE JUMP: • Teaching of different stages / phases of triple jump a) Approach Run b). Take off. For hop, Step, Jump and Landing of Hop+ Step c). Flying Phases d). Landing • General rules of the competition DISCUS THROW: • Teaching of Different stages of Discus throw a). Holding b) Initial stance c). Preliminary d). Turn e) Delivery action f) Reverse • General rules of the competition 42(47) LONG DISTANCE RACES: • Correct running Style emphasizing on proper body position and foot placement • Proper Leg and arm Action • Running Tactics • General rules of the competition PRACTICAL NOTE BOOK &VIVA

2. GYMNASTICS 25 MARKS

For Boys For Girls

FLOOR EXERCISES FLOOR EXERCISES

• Stand Scale front ways ,Side ways Front Split • Jump forward to roll Forward(Dive roll) Side Scale • Round off Hand Stand to Bridge • Head spring Roll backward to hand Stand • Hand spring Back walk -Over Hand Spring

PARALLEL BAR BALANCING BEAM

• Front Upraise to hand Support Jump to squat stand with one leg (Right or Left) • “L” Support Scissor Lead Jump • Roll backward on Upper arms “V” Balance • Roll Forward on Upper arms Roll Forward • Swing to Hand stand Standing scale Sideways

HORIZONTAL BAR

• Single leg up- Start (with Straight Leg) • Sole Circle Forward(leg Bent) • Hip Circle Backward • Front hip Circle • Straddle Dismount VAULTING TABLE VAULTING TABLE

• Jump to Straddle Stand Jump to Straddle Stand • Squat Vault Squat Vault

POMMEL UN- EVEN PARALLEL BAR

• Jump to Front Support Jump to Front Support • Single Leg Circle Outward(From Un- even Support ) Squat Through with one leg backward • Scissor Forward Single Leg Circle forward • Both Leg Circle Single Leg Circle backward • Single leg Dismount forward Free Hip Circle backward 42(48) Under Swing dismount over the low bar ROMAN RINGS

• Hanging scale rear ways. • Up- Start • “L” Support on Roman ring • Shoulder Stand • Dislocation

PRACTICAL NOTE BOOK AND VIVA

42(49) B.Sc.(Physical Education , Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-V

[THEORY OF GAMES /SPORTS(BASKETBALL) & VOCATIONAL ORIENTED COURSE(PHYSIOTHERAPY)]

Semester-IV

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV & V, Unit I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit ‘V’ will consists of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I, II, III & IV and Unit ‘V.’ is compulsory for all.

UNIT I

• Fundamental Skills of Basketball:- a)Passes -Two hand chest pass , Two hand bounce pass,

overhead pass, side arm pass, hook pass and back pass

• Dribbling: High low and reverse dribbling

• Shooting: Lay up Shot, Free Shot, Hook Shot, Jump Shot

• Rebounding: Offensive and Defensive

UNIT II

• Techniques and Tactics:- Meaning, Definition and types of tactics- Offensive ( Fast Break , Offensive

against Man to man, Offensive against zone Defence), Defensive (Man to Man Defence and Zone

Defence)

• Motor qualities related to basketball and their training.

• Officiating: Meaning, officials and their duties.

• Rules and their interpretation

UNIT-III

• Electrotherapy: Meaning and uses of high frequency current, short wave dia-thermy and ultra 42(50) sound therapy.

• Sports Injuries: Meaning, definition of sports injuries, precautions and preventions of sports injuries.

• Hydrotherapy: Hot Packs, Mud Bath, Spring Water Bath, Under water exercises

• Massage therapy: Meaning, Classification and Techniques of Massage, Lubricants used in massage

• Stroking/ Effleurage, Kneeding/ Petrisage, Rubbing/ Friction, Tapotment, Vibration and Shaking

UNIT IV

• Exercise Therapy : Basic Mechanical Points, Centre of Gravity, Line of Gravity, Planes and Axis

• Traction Therapy: Meaning, Uses and Techniques of Traction

• Classification of Movements : Active , passive and resistive and their effects

• Physiological Classification of movements: Voluntary and involuntary movements (associated, reflex

and cardiac movements)

Books recommended for further study:

BASKETBALL:

Coleman and Ray,’Basketball’ An official E.B.B.A. Publication, West Yorkshire,1976.

Pruitt,Jim ‘Play Better Basketball’ Matchplay Books,Wiltshire,1982.

Jain,Renu ‘Teach yourself basketball’Prena Publication,Delhi,2004

Sharma,O.P. ‘Basketball –skill &rules’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2003.

Sharma,J.P. ‘ Skills& Techniques –Basketball ’ Khel Sahitya, New Delhi,2008.

PHYSIOTHERAPY:

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’, Henery Ling Ltd. The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’Khel Sahitya Kendra, New Delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996.

Thomson,Ann, Skinner & Piercy, Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House, New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee, New York,1986

PRACTICAL 50(25+25) Marks

42(51) a) BASKETBALL 25 Marks

• Players stance and ball handling

• Passing and receiving techniques

• Passing -Two hand chest pass , Two hand bonce pass, overhead pass, side

• arm pass, hook pass and back pass

• Dribbling: High and low dribbling

• Shooting: Lay up Shot, Free Shot, Hook Shot , Jump Shot

• Rebounding: Offensive and Defensive

• Tactics- Offensive ( Fast Break , Offensive against Man to man, Offensive

• against zone Defence), Defensive (Man to Man Defence and Zone Defence)

• Practical Notebook and Viva

b) PHYSIOTHERAPY 25 Marks

• Electrotherapy: Short wave dia-thermy and ultra sound therapy.

• Hydrotherapy: Hot Packs, Mud Bath, Spring Water Bath, Under water

• exercises

• Massage Therapy:- Stroking/ Effleurage, Kneeding/ Petrisage, Rubbing/

• Friction, Tapotment, Vibration/ Shaking ,massage of upper limbs, lower

• limbs, back, head, face, chest and abdomen.

• Exercise Therapy:- Active , passive and resistive movements

• Practical Notebook and Viva

42(52) Scheme of Examination for B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education and Sports).

Six Semester Course.

Vth. Semester

Theory Marks Int. Assessment Total Marks

Paper-Ist. Psychology & Sociology of Physical 60 15 75 Education & Sports

Paper-IInd. Fundamentals of Sports Training 60 15 75 Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Bio-Mechanics 60 15 75 Paper-IVth. Theory of Games & Sports 60 15 75 Paper-Vth. Theory of Games /Sports (Kho-Kho) & 60 15 75 Vocation Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) Paper-VIth. English 60 15 75 Total:_ 450____

VIth. Semester

Paper-Ist. Psychology & Sociology of 60 15 75 Physical Education & Sports Practical 50 Paper-IInd. Fundamental of Sports Training 60 15 75 Practical 50 Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Biomechanics 60 15 75 Practical 50 Paper-IVth. Theory of Games & Sports 60 15 75 i)Track & Field ii) Game of Specialization) Practical 50 Paper-Vth. Theory of Games /Sports (Kho-Kho) & 60 15 75 Vocation Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) Practical 50 Paper-VIth. English 60 15 75

Total: 700

Grant Total of Vth.& VIth. Semester 450+700=1150 42(53) Syllabus for BSc. III Health Education Physical Education &Sports Science ( Semester –V ) Paper-Ist. Psychology & Sociology of Physical Education & Sports

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit-1 • Meaning & Scope of Psychology & sports Psychology • Psychological factors effecting Physical Education • Meaning & Nature of Learning • Laws of learning ,type of learning curve • Learning Process

Unit-2 • Motivation , Meaning & Definition • Role of Motivations in Physical Education & Sports • Types of Motivation, Methods of Motivation Importance of Motivation in Phy. Edu. & Sports

Unit-3 • Sociology , Meaning of Sociology • Scope of Sociology • Sociology of Physical Education & Sports • Social Significance of Sports

Unit-4 • Sports as an Socializing Agency • Social Phenomenon • Sports & Socialization • Definition of Socialization group cohesion

42(54) Semester V

Paper –II Fundamentals of Sport Training

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit 1

Meaning & Definition of Sports Training Aims of Sport Training objectives of sports Training. Characteristics of Sports Training Important Features of Training Load

Unit 2 Training Plan Long term & short term plan Cycle process of Training Method of development of techniqu

Unit 3

Definition of load & Training Load Type of Load Relationship between load & adaptation Condition of adaptation

Unit 4 Physical fitness Development of important motor components Strength training means & methods Endurance- forms of endurance, means & methods

42(55) Semester-V

Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Biomechanics.

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit I • Meaning of Bio Mechanics • Aim and objectives of bio mechanics • Importance of bio mechanics in the field of physical education and sports • Meaning and types and causes of motion

Unit II • Meaning of linear kinematics • Speed, velocity, acceleration and projectile motion • Meaning of angular kinematics • Angular speed, Angular velocity and angular acceleration

Unit III Relationship between linear and angular acceleration • Meaning of linear kinetics • Mass weight , force, pressure, work, power, energy, friction • Meaning of angular kinetics

Unit IV • Movement of inertia, conservation of momentum and transfer of momentum • Meaning and types lever • Meaning types equilibrium • Newtons Law of Motion

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

1. A.Yobu, Sports Biomechanics Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 2. Bunu, Scientific principals of coaching, Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1962 3. Dysom, the mechanics of athletics, Halmes and Meiar M.K. 1977 4. Hay, the biomechanics of sports techniques Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1978 5. Mechnotech Biomechanic Sportlicher Bowegungan sports verley Berlin 1978

42(56) 6. Miller and Nelson, biomechanics of sports, Log and Fehier, Philadalphia 1973 7. P.D.Sharma Gativigyan ka yantrik Vishlashan Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 8. Rajlakshmi D. Biomechanics in games and sports Friends Publication India 2009 9. Sussan J Hall Basic Biomechanics Friends Publication India 2009 10. Uppal, A.K. Biomechanics in physical education and exercise science, Friends Publication India 2009

42(57) Semester V

Paper-IV. Theory of Games & sports 1) Athletics 2) Handball

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all. Unit I Hurdles  Swinging leg action  Training leg action  Clearance of hurdle emphasizing on proper truck  Position & arm action.  Development rhythm from start to first hurdles & be between hundles Unit- II Pole Vault:  Pole grip & carry.  Role plant.  Rock lack  Pull up  Push up  Bar clearance  Landing

Unit III  History of Handball :- The correct way to catch the ball with two hands, Catching the low ball, running ,catching the high ball , Catching the ball to the side. Diagram of hand ball court ,preparation of score sheet Unit IV

 Passing & Throwing :  Two handed chest pass  One ha needed shoulder pass  The reverse pass  The pass to the side  The long pass C Running with the ball (dribbling ). 42(58) Semester-V Paper-V: Theory of Games/ Sports (Kho-Kho) & Vocational Oriented Course (Physiotherapy)

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Kho-Kho Unit I

• History of Kho-Kho in India • Organisation of Kho-Kho: working federation of kho-kho at district level, state level and national level. • Warming up meaning, definition types and importance of warming up. • Maintenance of Score Sheet Unit II

• Layout and Maintenance of Kho-Kho play field • Equipment used in Kho-Kho and their specifications • Motor qualities related to Kho Kho and their training • Training load – Meaning & its types

PHYSIOTHERAP

Unit III

Exercise Therapy :-

• Posture meaning, classification of posture, values of good posture, causes of poor posture. • Postural deformities, Kyphosis, Lordosis and Scoliosis causes, corrective exercises • Method of checking Posture Alignment Unit IV

Circulatory System:-

• Meaning physiology of heart, causes of heart failure, coronary occultation and thrombosis, chronic valvular disorder, symptoms, causes and treatment Respiratory System:- • Meaning, organs, Bronchitis, Tuberculosis, symptoms, causes and treatments Arthritis :-

• Meaning, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteo Arthritis Symptoms, Causes and treatment of Arthritis.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

Kho-Kho

42(59) Mishra Shard Chander (2007) Kho Kho Seekhain . Sports Publication New Delhi

AP Publisher (2003) Kho Kho , 19 Market Chownk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar

Physiotherapy:

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’,Henery Ling Ltd.The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’khel sahitya kendra,new delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996

Thomson,Ann,Skinner & Piercy,Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House,New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee,New York,1986.

42(60) Semester-V

SYLLABUS B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education & Sports)

PAPER-VI [ENGLISH]

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

1. The following Chapters of book. The Spectrum of Life-Anthology of Modern Press: 20 marks i. If you are wrong Admit it ii. Streamlining 2. Summary writing 10 marks 3. Business letters for puocuring goods etc. 10 marks 4. Grammar : Common errors & Punctuation 10 marks

5. Vocabulary related to sports ( English to Hindi ): Physical Education, Health Education, Socialisation, Cooperation, Competition, Psychology,Idealism, Pragmatis m, Aim, Objectives, Importance, Culture,Recreation,Offensive,Defensive,Rhythm,C orrective,Dedication, Emotions, Profession, Patriotism, Common Wealth Games, Artistic and Sociology Asian Games, OlympicSpirit, Olympic Motto, Olympic torch, National Flag, National Anthem, National Song, Awards.

10 Marsk

BOOK RECOMMENDED

The Spectrum of life – An Anthology of modern press Edited by Manmohan K. Bhat Nagar MACMILLAN INDIA LTD. 2/10 Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi-110002

Semester VI

Paper-Ist. Psychology &Sociology of Physical Education & Sports

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit-1

42(61) • Transfer of Training • Definitions of Transfer of Training • Types of Transfer of Training • Factors effecting Transfer of Training

Unit-2

• Personality, Meaning & Definition • Personality traits • Characteristics of Personality factors effecting development & personality ( Heredity -& Environment ) Role of Physical Activity in the development of Personality.

Unit-3

• Relationship of Physical Education & Sports With other Socializing Institutions (family & education System) • Sports as a regulating institute of Society • State & Religion • Role of institutions in Participation in games & sports with regards to either sex

Unit-4

• Sports & Social Problems • Behaviour of Sportman & Spectators • Leadership through Physical Education & Sports • Qualities & Qualification of good leader.

Practical-50 Marks Any four test of 10 marks each. Practical file & viva 10 marks. 1. 1 Sports man Personality test 13+ Spielberger- Indian Adopt 2. Social Intelligence Test Dr. N.K. Chadda Ms. Usha Gane san 3. Sports competition Anxiety Inventory Ravi kant & Dr.V.N. Mishra 4. Inventory for factors influencing sports by Dr. M.L. Kamlesh 5. Sociometry 6. Reaction time 7. will to win Question naire Dr. Kumar Games & Sports interest Test Age12+

42(62) Book Recommended

7) Kane, J.S. Psychological aspects of education & Sports.

8) Jawthar, J.D. Psychological of Coaching present Hall , Inc, R.J. (1951) 9) Martens Social Psychology & physical activity harper Harper & Row Pub. N.Y. (9175)

10) Singer R.N. Coaching , athletics & Psychological Mograw Mills Books. Co. (1972).

11) Singer R.N. Physical Educational an integrat approach .Rolt , Rivehert & R.Y.(9172)

12)Suiin , R.N. Psychology in Sports, Surjit Publication , Delhi (1982)

13) Hilgera & Atkinson Introduction to Psychology Ox fore & 18M. Pub. New Delhi 1979.7.).

14) Puni AT Sports NTS, Chandigarh. Psychology 15) Ajmer Singh Essentials of Physical Education

16) Dr. Jagdish Baina B.P.E. , B.P.ed. , D.P.ed. , & M. P.ed. Courses

17) Shashi Jain Introduction to Psychology

42(63) Semester VI

Paper-IInd. Fundamental of Sports Training

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all. Unit 1 Motor Components, Meaning Importance of motor components Development of motor components Unit 2 Flexibility & Agility Forms of Flexibility & Agility Base of Flexibility & Agility Development of flexibility & Agility its methods Unit-3 Meaning of Coordination Coordination Ability Development methods of coordination Unit-4 Warning up & Cooling Town Types of Warming up Significance of W.U. Methods of W.P. Cooling Down free hand & Stretching Exercise for W.P.& C.D.

Practical- 50 Marks :

Practical file & viva 10 marks Any four of 10 Marks each. (a) Continuous Running. (b) Interval Training (c) Canadian Test for phy. fitness (d) Circuit Training (e) Weight Training

Book Recommended

1 Batty , B: Practical & Motor Development in infants & children. Prentice hall,1979. 2 Dick, F.W. ;Sports Training Principles lepus, London 1980. 3 enson C.R. Bischer, A.G. Scientific basic of Athletic Condition lea & 42(64) Bebiger, Philedephie, 1972 4 Matweyew, L.:P: Fundamental of Sports training ( Translation form Russian ) Mir Publisher, Moscow, 1981. 5. Pyke, Frank, S: Towards better Coaching ,Australian Government Publishing Services , Canberra, 1980. 5 Singh, Hisports Training General Theory & Methods, NIS, Patiala, 1984. 7 Willmore,J.H: Athletic Training: & Physical fitness, Allyn & Bacon, Inc Sydney 1977.

42(65) Semester- VI

Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Biomechanics.

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit I • Meaning of kinesiology • History of kinesiology • Aims and objective of kinesiology • Importance of kinesiology in the field of physical education and sports

Unit II • Centre of gravity and line of gravity • Anatomical standing position and fundamental standing position • Planes and types of planes • Axis and types of axis

Unit III • Movements on sagittal plane with frontal axis • Movements on frontal plane with sagittal axis • Movements on horizontal plane with vertical axis • Structural classification of muscles

Unit IV • Structure of motor actions- cyclic, acyclic and movement combination • Movement rhythm, movement coupling, movement flow and movement amplitude • Reciprocal innervation and inhabitation • All or none law , muscle tone and its importance

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

1. Cooper and Glassgow, Kinesiology, C.V. Mosby co. Saint Louis, 1976 2. David Paul Green Kinesiology: Movement in the context of activity Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 3. Dugch and Duch, Kinesiology and applied anatomy, Lee and Fabiger, Philadelphin, 1977 4. Graive, Miller, Mitohelgon, Paul and Smith, techniques for the analysis of human movement lapse books London, 1975 5. Hay and Deij ,the anatomical and mechanical basis of human motion, Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1982 6. Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 7. Logan and Mckinney, Anatomic Kinesiology, M.C.Brown Co., 1977 8. Marliyn and Hinsen, Kinesiology, Web Dubuque Lown 1977 9. Nancy Hamiliton, Kinesiology: The scientific basis of motion (10th ed),Friends Publication India 2009 10. Thompson, Manual Structural Kinesiology, Friends Publication India 2009

42(66) PRACTICAL 50 MARKS

• Practical Note Book and viva

• Centre of gravity, line of gravity • Anatomical standing position and fundamental standing position • Planes and types of planes • Axis and types of axis • Movements on sagittal plane about frontal axis • Movements on frontal plane about sagittal axis • Movements on horizontal plane with vertical axis

42(67) Semester VI

Paper IVth. Theory of Games & Sports i) Athletic ii) Handball

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

 Holding  Carry  Approch run  Last five strids rhythm including impulse stride  Delivery stance  Reverse Unit II Hammer Throw

 Grip  Initial stance  Preliminary From swings to turns  Transition from swings to tums.  Truns  Delivery Stance  Delivery Action  Reverse

Unit III  Shooting

 T he falling shot form outside.  The falling shot with feint  The diving shot  The standing throw shot  The jump shot  The penalty shot  The reverse shot

42(68)  The fall shot Unit IV Goal Keeping

Characteristics of good goal keeper

Importance of goal keeping .

Tactics

6-0 Setting –up defence

5-1 Defence formation & movement. 4-2 Defence formation & movement. 3.2 Defence formation & movement. Attack against 6-0 defence. Attack against 5-1 defence Attack against 4-2 defence Attack against 3-3 defence

 Duties of officials ( before game during game after the games )

Practical – 50 Marks

25 marks Track & field 5 marks each File & viva 10 marks 25marks Handball file & viva 10 marks & 5 marks each for 3 fundamentals

Books Recomendded  Rowland B.J. Handball a Complete Guide London ;  Faber & Faber Ltd., 24 Rosset square ,1970

 Mend,Charless L? Handball fundamentals.Cino Charle,  E.Maril Company (columns) 1968.

 Philips E. E. Hand ball its play & Management  New York. The Ronal Press Company , 1957

 Roberson, Richard & 01 son  Nerbert. Geainning Hand ball

 Califormia Wadswo H ”Company  Ine.Belmost, !969.

42(69) SEMESTER-VI

Paper-V : Theory of Games/Sports (Kho-Kho) & Vocational Oriented Course (Physiotherapy). Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment : 15

KHO-KHO

Unit I

• Rules and their interpretation • Factors Affecting Sports performance • Center of gravity and line of gravity • Tie Break in Kho Kho • Officiating meaning and principles of officiating Unit II

• Duties of officials in Kho-Kho( Before, After and during the game) • Sitting in square and its methods • Giving Kho and its methods • Techniques and tactics meaning, attacking and defensive skills. • Types of Kho-Kho and tappin

PRACTICAL:- 25 Marks

• Practical Note Book and viva

• Offensive skills- chasing, giving Kho, sitting in the square, covering, ring game, pole dive, simple dive,

taping

• Defensive skills- single chain, double chain, 3,3,2 chain,2,2,3 chain, ring(short, middle, long) game, pole

hold, avoid pole.

PHYSIOTHERAPY

Unit III

• Sports Injuries:- Meaning, types, precautions and treatment of sports injuries Massage Therapy :- Meaning, physiological effects of general massage on muscular system & nervous System • Postural deformities :- Bow Leges, Knocking Knees & Flat Foot Causes .Corrective exercise 42(70) Unit IV

• Circulatory System :- Meaning, congenital abnormalities, hyper tension, anemia, symptoms causes and treatment • Arthritis :- Meaning, Spondylities, Symptoms Causes & treatment • Deruved positions by moving the arm, leg head , Neck & Trank in all these fundamental position • Duties of physiotherapists before and after surgery PRACTICAL: 25 Marks

• Practical Note Book and viva • Soft tissue sports injuries- symptoms, causes and treatment • Massage Therapy- qualities of good massager and lubricants used in massage • Order of technique of message for different parts of the boby upper limbs & lower limbs • Bronchitis, tuberculosis symptoms causes and treatment • Kyphosis , Lordosis , symptoms, causes and treatment.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

KHO-KHO

Mishra Shard Chander (2007) Kho Kho Seekhain . Sports Publication New Delhi

AP Publisher (2003) Kho Kho , 19 Market Chownk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar

PHYSIOTHERAPY

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’,Henery Ling Ltd.The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’khel sahitya kendra,new delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996

Thomson,Ann,Skinner & Piercy,Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House,New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee,New York,1986.

42(71) SYLLABUS B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education & Sports) PAPER-VI [ENGLISH]

Semester-VI

Time : Three hours Theory Marks: 60 Int. Assessment: 15

1. The following Chapters of book. The Spectrum of Life-Anthology of Modern Press: 20 Marks

i. The Western intellectual tradition ii. The scientific point of view. 2. Paragraph writing on Sports related topics 10 Marks 3. Grammar : Tag questions, Agreement of verbs and subject & confusion 10 Marks of adjectives and adverbs. 4. Vocabulary related to sports (Hindi to English) 05 Marks

Full Form of Degree, 05 Marks

1. C.Ped. 2. B.Ped. 3. M Ped.,M.Phill. 4. M..P.E Ph.D. 5. Application writing with bio data for jobs. 10 Marks

BOOK RECOMMENDED The Spectrum of life – An Anthology of modern press Edited by Manmohan K. Bhat Nagar MACMILLAN INDIA LTD. 2/10 Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi-110002

42(72) Scheme of Examination for B.Sc (Phsical Education, Health Education and Sports).

Six Semester Course.

Vth. Semester Theory Marks Int. Assessment Total Marks Paper-Ist. Psychology & Sociology of Physical 60 10 70 Education & Sports Paper-IInd. Fundamentals of Sports Training 60 10 70 Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Bio-Mechanics 60 10 70 Paper-IVth. Theory of Games & Sports 60 10 70 Paper-Vth. Theory of Games /sports (Kho-Kho) & 60 10 70 Vocation Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) Paper-VIth. English 60 10 70 Total 420

VI th. Semester Paper-Ist. Psychology & Sociology of 60 10 70 Physical Education Practical 60 Paper-IInd. Fundamentals of Sports Training 60 10 70 Practical 60 Paper-IIIrd. Kinesiology & Bio-Mechanics 60 10 70 Practical 60 Paper-IVth. Theory of Games & Sports 60 10 70 i) Track & Field ii) Game of Specialization) Practical 60 Paper-Vth. Theory of Games /sports (Kho-Kho) & 60 10 70 Vocation Oriented Course (Physiotherapy) Practical 60 Paper-VIth. English 60 10 70 Total :720

Grant Total of Vth. & VIth. Semester = 420+720 =1140

42(73) Syllabus for BSc. III Health Education Physical Education &Sports Science

Paper I ( Semester –V ) Psychology & Sociology of Physical Education & Sports

Time :3 Hours Max.Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all

Unit-2 • Motivation , Meaning & Definition • Role of Motivations in Physical Education & Sports • Types of Motivation, Methods of Motivation Importance of Motivation in Phy. Edu. & Sports

Unit-3 • Sociology , Meaning of Sociology • Scope of Sociology • Sociology of Physical Education & Sports • Social Significance of Sports

Unit-4 • Sports as an Socializing Agency • Social Phenomenon • Sports & Socialization • Definition of Socialization group cohesion

42(74) Paper –II

Fundamentals of Sport Training

Semester V Time :3 Hours Max.Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all

Unit 1

Meaning & Definition of Sports Training Aims of Sport Training objectives of sports Training. Characteristics of Sports Training Important Features of Training Load

Unit 2 Training Plan Long term & short term plan Cycle process of Training Method of development of techniqu

Unit 3

Definition of load & Training Load Type of Load Relationship between load & adaptation Condition of adaptation

Unit 4 Physical fitness Development of important motor components Strength training means & methods Endurance- forms of endurance, means & methods

42(75) SYLLABUS B.Sc.(Physical Education, Health Education &Sports) PAPER-III Kinesiology & Bio-Mechanics

Semester-V

Time :3 Hours Max. Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all.

Unit I • Meaning of Bio Mechanics • Aim and objectives of bio mechanics • Importance of bio mechanics in the field of physical education and sports • Meaning and types and causes of motion

Unit II • Meaning of linear kinematics • Speed, velocity, acceleration and projectile motion • Meaning of angular kinematics • Angular speed, Angular velocity and angular acceleration

Unit III Relationship between linear and angular acceleration • Meaning of linear kinetics • Mass weight , force, pressure, work, power, energy, friction • Meaning of angular kinetics

Unit IV • Movement of inertia, conservation of momentum and transfer of momentum • Meaning and types lever • Meaning types equilibrium • Newtons Law of Motion

42(76) BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

11. A.Yobu, Sports Biomechanics Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 12. Bunu, Scientific principals of coaching, Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1962 13. Dysom, the mechanics of athletics, Halmes and Meiar M.K. 1977 14. Hay, the biomechanics of sports techniques Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1978 15. Mechnotech Biomechanic Sportlicher Bowegungan sports verley Berlin 1978 16. Miller and Nelson, biomechanics of sports, Log and Fehier, Philadalphia 1973 17. P.D.Sharma Gativigyan ka yantrik Vishlashan Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 18. Rajlakshmi D. Biomechanics in games and sports Friends Publication India 2009 19. Sussan J Hall Basic Biomechanics Friends Publication India 2009 20. Uppal, A.K. Biomechanics in physical education and exercise science, Friends Publication India 2009.

42(77) Theory of Games & sports Paper IV

3) Athletics 4) Handball

Semester V

Unit I

Hurdles

 Swinging leg action  Training leg action  Clearance of hurdle emphasizing on proper truck  Position & arm action.  Development rhythm from start to first hurdles & be between hundles

Unit- II

Pole Vault:

 Pole grip & carry.  Role plant.  Rock lack  Pull up  Push up  Bar clearance  Landing

42(78) Unit III

 History of Handball :- The correct way to catch the ball with two hands, Catching the low ball, running ,catching the high ball , Catching the ball to the side. Diagram of hand ball court ,preparation of score sheet

Unit IV

 Passing & Throwing :  Two handed chest pass  One ha needed shoulder pass  The reverse pass  The pass to the side  The long pass  C Running with the ball (dribbling )

42(79) PAPER-V

[THEORY OF GAMES/SPORTS(KHO-KHO) & VOCATIONAL ORIENTED COURSE(PHYSIOTHERAPY)]

Semester-V

Kho-Kho

Unit I

• History of Kho-Kho in India

• Organisation of Kho-Kho: working federation of kho-kho at district level, state level and national level.

• Warming up meaning, definition types and importance of warming up.

• Maintenance of Score Sheet

Unit II

• Layout and Maintenance of Kho-Kho play field

• Equipment used in Kho-Kho and their specifications

• Motor qualities related to Kho Kho and their training

• Training load – Meaning & its types

PHYSIOTHERAP

Unit III

Exercise Therapy :-

• Posture meaning, classification of posture, values of good posture, causes of poor posture.

42(80) • Postural deformities, Kyphosis, Lordosis and Scoliosis causes, corrective exercises

• Method of checking Posture Alignment

Unit IV

Circulatory System:-

• Meaning physiology of heart, causes of heart failure, coronary occultation and thrombosis, chronic

valvular disorder, symptoms, causes and treatment

Respiratory System:-

• Meaning, organs, Bronchitis, Tuberculosis, symptoms, causes and treatments

Arthritis :-

• Meaning, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteo Arthritis Symptoms, Causes and treatment of Arthritis.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

Kho-Kho

Mishra Shard Chander (2007) Kho Kho Seekhain . Sports Publication New Delhi

AP Publisher (2003) Kho Kho , 19 Market Chownk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar

Physiotherapy:

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’,Henery Ling Ltd.The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’khel sahitya kendra,new delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996

Thomson,Ann,Skinner & Piercy,Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House,New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee,New York,1986.

42(81) SYLLABUS B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education & Sports) PAPER-VI [ENGLISH]

Semester-V

Time :3 Hours Max.Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 6. The following Chapters of book. The Spectrum of Life-Anthology of Modern Press: 20 marks i. If you are wrong Admit it ii. Streamlining 7. Summary writing 10 marks 8. Business letters for puocuring goods etc. 10 marks 9. Grammar : Common errors & Punctuation 10 marks

10. Vocabulary related to sports ( English to Hindi ): Physical Education, Health Education, Socialisation, Cooperation, Competition, Psychology,Idealism, Pragmatis m, Aim, Objectives, Importance, Culture,Recreation,Offensive,Defensive,Rhythm,C orrective,Dedication, Emotions, Profession, Patriotism, Common Wealth Games, Artistic and Sociology Asian Games, OlympicSpirit, Olympic Motto, Olympic torch, National Flag, National Anthem, National Song, Awards.

BOOK RECOMMENDED The Spectrum of life – An Anthology of modern press Edited by Manmohan K. Bhat Nagar MACMILLAN INDIA LTD. 2/10 Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi-110002

42(82) Semester VI Paper-I Psychology & Sociology of Physical Education & Sports. Time: 3 Hours Max.Marks: 60 Internal Assessment: 10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all Unit-1

• Transfer of Training • Definitions of Transfer of Training • Types of Transfer of Training • Factors effecting Transfer of Training

Unit-2

Unit-3

Unit-4

• Sports & Social Problems • Behaviour of Sportman & Spectators • Leadership through Physical Education & Sports • Qualities & Qualification of good leader.

Practical-60 Marks Any five text of 10 marks each. Practical file & viva 10 marks. 1 Sports man Personality test 13+ Spielberger- Indian Adopt 2. Social Intelligence Test Dr. N.K. Chadda Ms. Usha Gane san 42(83) 3. Sports competition Anxiety Inventory Ravi kant & Dr.V.N. Mishra 4. Inventory for factors influencing sports by Dr. M.L. Kamlesh 5. Sociometry 6. Reaction time 7. will to win Question naire Dr. Kumar Games & Sports interest Test Age12+

Book Recommended

1) Al demen, A.B. Psychological Beha vious in sports. A.B.Saundder’s Co. Saunders (1974) 2 Craatty B,J. Psychology & physical a activity- Prentice Hall,inc. london (1961) 3) Cratty, B,J. Psychology in Cont emporary Sports, Prentice Hall, inc . Englewood Ciliff (1973) 4 ) Cratty, B.J, Social dimenision of physical activity Prentice Hall, inc. , B.J. 5) Cratty B.J. Social Psychology in athlectice. Prentice Hall.inc. F.J. (9981) 6) Frost & Rehbon Psychological concepts applied of physical 1 educational & coaching Massechu satts (1972) 7) Kane, J.S. Psychological aspects of education & Sports. 8) Jawthar, J.D. Psychological of Coaching present Hall , Inc, R.J. (1951) 9) Martens Social Psychology & physical activity harper Harper & Row Pub. N.Y. (9175) 10) Singer R.N. Coaching , athletics & Psychological Mograw Mills Books. Co. (1972). 11) Singer R.N. Physical Educational an integrat approach .Rolt , Rivehert & R.Y.(9172) 12)Suiin , R.N. Psychology in Sports, Surjit Publication , Delhi (1982) 13) Hilgera & Atkinson Introduction to Psychology Ox fore & 18M. Pub. New Delhi 1979.7.). 14) Puni AT Sports NTS, Chandigarh. Psychology 15) Ajmer Singh Essentials of Physical Education 16) Dr. Jagdish Baina B.P.E. , B.P.ed. , D.P.ed. , & M. P.ed. Courses 17) Shashi Jain Introduction to Psychology

42(84) Paper-II

Fundamentals of Sport Training

Semester VI

Time :3 Hours Max. Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all

Unit 1 Motor Components, Meaning Importance of motor components Development of motor components

Unit 2

Flexibility & Agility Forms of Flexibility & Agility Base of Flexibility & Agility Development of flexibility & Agility its methods Unit-3

Meaning of Coordination Coordination Ability Development methods of coordination Unit-4

Warning up & Cooling Town Types of Warming up Significance of W.U. Methods of W.P. Cooling Down free hand & Stretching Exercise for W.P.& C.D.

Practical- 60 Marks

Practical file & viva 10 marks

(f) Continuous Running. (g) Interval Training (h) Canadian Test for phy. fitness (i) Circuit Training (j) Weight Training

42(85) Book Recommended

1 Batty , B: Practical & Motor Development in infants & children. Prentice hall,1979.

2 Dick, F.W. ;Sports Training Principles lepus, London 1980.

3 Jenson C.R. Bischer, A.G. Scientific basic of Athletic Condition lea & Bebiger, Philedephie, 1972

4 Matweyew, L.:P: Fundamental of Sports training ( Translation form Russian ) Mir Publisher, Moscow, 1981.

5 Pyke, Frank, S: Towards better Coaching ,Australian Government Publishing Services , Canberra, 1980.

6 Singh, Hisports Training General Theory & Methods, NIS, Patiala, 1984.

7 Willmore,J.H: Athletic Training: & Physical fitness, Allyn & Bacon, Inc Sydney 1977.

42(86) SYLLABUS B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education &Sports) PAPER-III Kinesiology & Biomechanics

Semester-VI

Time :3 Hours Max. Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all.

Unit I • Meaning of kinesiology • History of kinesiology • Aims and objective of kinesiology • Importance of kinesiology in the field of physical education and sports

Unit II • Centre of gravity and line of gravity • Anatomical standing position and fundamental standing position • Planes and types of planes • Axis and types of axis

42(87) BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

11. Cooper and Glassgow, Kinesiology, C.V. Mosby co. Saint Louis, 1976 12. David Paul Green Kinesiology: Movement in the context of activity Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 13. Dugch and Duch, Kinesiology and applied anatomy, Lee and Fabiger, Philadelphin, 1977 14. Graive, Miller, Mitohelgon, Paul and Smith, techniques for the analysis of human movement lapse books London, 1975 15. Hay and Deij ,the anatomical and mechanical basis of human motion, Prentics Hall, Inc. N.J. 1982 16. Jogishwar Goswami Basic Kinesiology Friends Publication India 2009 17. Logan and Mckinney, Anatomic Kinesiology, M.C.Brown Co., 1977 18. Marliyn and Hinsen, Kinesiology, Web Dubuque Lown 1977 19. Nancy Hamiliton, Kinesiology: The scientific basis of motion (10th ed),Friends Publication India 2009 20. Thompson, Manual Structural Kinesiology, Friends Publication India 2009

PRACTICAL 60 MARKS

• Practical Note Book and viva

42(88) Semester VI Theory of Games & sports Paper IV 1) Athletics 2) Handball Time :3 Hours Max. Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective units of the syllabus and will carry10 marks each .Unit V will consists of 10 short answers which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks each. Candidates are required to attempt one question each from unit I, II, III & IV and unit V is compulsory for all Unit 1 Javelin Throw

 Holding  Carry  Approch run  Last five strids rhythm including impulse stride  Delivery stance  Reverse Unit II

Hammer Throw

 Grip  Initial stance  Preliminary From swings to turns  Transition from swings to tums.  Truns  Delivery Stance  Delivery Action  Reverse

Unit III

 Shooting

 T he falling shot form outside.  The falling shot with feint  The diving shot  The standing throw shot  The jump shot  The penalty shot  The reverse shot  The fall shot

42(89) Unit IV

Goal Keeping Characteristics of good goal keeper Importance of goal keeping .

Tactics 6-0 Setting –up defence

 Duties of officials ( before game during game after the games )

Practical – 60 Marks

File & viva 10 marks 30marks Track & field 5 marks each 30 marks Handball file & viva 10 marks & 5 marks eac

Books Recomendded:

 Rowland B.J. Handball a Complete Guide London ;  Faber & Faber Ltd., 24 Rosset square ,1970

 Mend,Charless L? Handball fundamentals.Cino Charle,  E.Maril Company (columns) 1968.

 Philips E. E. Hand ball its play & Management  New York. The Ronal Press Company , 1957

 Roberson, Richard & 01 son  Nerbert. Geainning Hand ball

 Califormia Wadswo H ”Company  Ine.Belmost, 1969.

42(90) SEMESTER-VI PAPER-V [THEORY OF GAMES/SPORTS(KHO-KHO) & VOCATIONAL ORIENTED COURSE(PHYSIOTHERAPY)]

KHO-KHO

Unit I

• Rules and their interpretation

• Factors Affecting Sports performance

• Center of gravity and line of gravity

• Tie Break in Kho Kho

• Officiating meaning and principles of officiating

Unit II

• Duties of officials in Kho-Kho( Before, After and during the game)

• Sitting in square and its methods

• Giving Kho and its methods

• Techniques and tactics meaning, attacking and defensive skills.

• Types of Kho-Kho and tappin

PRACTICAL:- 30 Marks

• Practical Note Book and viva

• Offensive skills- chasing, giving Kho, sitting in the square, covering, ring game, pole dive, simple dive,

taping

42(91) • Defensive skills- single chain, double chain, 3,3,2 chain,2,2,3 chain, ring(short, middle, long) game, pole

hold, avoid pole.

PHYSIOTHERAPY

Unit III

• Sports Injuries:- Meaning, types, precautions and treatment of sports injuries

Massage Therapy :- Meaning, physiological effects of general massage on muscular

system & nervous System

• Postural deformities :- Bow Leges, Knocking Knees & Flat Foot Causes .Corrective exercise

Unit IV

• Circulatory System :- Meaning, congenital abnormalities, hyper tension, anemia, symptoms causes and

treatment

• Arthritis :- Meaning, Spondylities, Symptoms Causes & treatment

• Deruved positions by moving the arm, leg head , Neck & Trank in all these fundamental position

• Duties of physiotherapists before and after surgery

PRACTICAL: 30 MARKS

• Practical Note Book and viva

• Soft tissue sports injuries- symptoms, causes and treatment

• Massage Therapy- qualities of good massager and lubricants used in massage

• Order of technique of message for different parts of the boby upper limbs & lower limbs

• Bronchitis, tuberculosis symptoms causes and treatment

• Kyphosis , Lordosis , symptoms, causes and treatment.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR FURTHER STUDY:

KHO-KHO

Mishra Shard Chander (2007) Kho Kho Seekhain . Sports Publication New Delhi

AP Publisher (2003) Kho Kho , 19 Market Chownk Adda Tanda, Jalandhar 42(92) PHYSIOTHERAPY

Wale,J.O.’. Tidy.S Massage And Remedial Exercise’,Henery Ling Ltd.The Dorset Press ,UK, 1987

Chandra Shekher,K. ‘sports physiotherapy’khel sahitya kendra,new delhi,2003

Pandey,P.K.&Gupta ,L.C.’Outline of Sports Medicine’Jaypee Brothers,New Delhi, 1996

Thomson,Ann,Skinner & Piercy,Joan ‘Tidy’s Physiotherapy’,Verghese Publishing House,New Delhi, 1996

Ambast,Anju,’Prevention and Treatment of Sports Injuries’ Khel Sahitya,New Delhi,2005.

Griffth,Winter,H.’Complete guide to Sports Injuries’The Body Press/Perigee,New York,1986.

42(93) SYLLABUS B.Sc. (Physical Education, Health Education & Sports) PAPER-VI [ENGLISH]

Semester-VI

Time :3 Hours Max.Marks: 60 Internal Assessment:10 5. The following Chapters of book. The Spectrum of Life-Anthology of Modern Press: 20 marks

iii. The Western intellectual tradition iv. The scientific point of view. 6. Paragraph writing on Sports related topics 10 marks 7. Grammar : Tag questions, Agreement of verbs and subject & confusion of adjectives and adverbs. 8. Vocabulary related to sports (Hindi to English) 50 marks

Full Form of Degree, 05 marks

6. C.Ped. 7. B.Ped. 8. M Ped.,M.Phill. 9. M..P.E Ph.D. 10. Application writing with bio data for jobs. 10 Marks

BOOK RECOMMENDED The Spectrum of life – An Anthology of modern press Edited by Manmohan K. Bhat Nagar MACMILLAN INDIA LTD. 2/10 Ansari Road, Darya Ganj New Delhi-110002

42(94) New Scheme of Examination for B.P.Ed (One year Course) -2011.

B.P.Ed- One year course Theory: 3 hours

Theory Int.Assment Total Minimum pass marks

Paper-I. History & Principles of Physical 80 20 100 35 Education & Sports Paper –II. Psychology & Sociology with reference 80 20 100 35 to Physical Education & Sports Paper –III. Anatomy, Physiology & Kinesiology 80 20 100 35 Paper – IV. Sports Management 80 20 100 35 Paper – V. Techniques of Officiating & Coaching 80 20 100 35 Paper – VI. Health Education, Yoga & Recreation 80 20 100 35 Total: 600 .

PART-II PRACTICALS

: 300 Marks a) External Evaluation : 240 marks b) Internal Assessment : 60 Marks

42(95) B.P.Ed

Paper-I HISTORY & PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION & SPORTS

Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I i) Definition, Meaning & Scope of Physical Education ii) Aims & Objectives of Physical Education iii) Relationship of Physical Education & Recreation iv) Contribution of Physical Education towards general education.

Unit-II i) History of Physical Education in ancient Greek, comparative study of Spartan & Athanian education ii) The origin and development of Olympic Games iii) Development of Asian games

Unit-III i) Physical Education in Germany, Sweedan & Denmark (Emphasis only on contribution of Basedaw, Guts-Muths, John Spiess, Machtegall, Ling) ii) Present status of Physical education & Recreation in Russia and Japan. iii) History of Physical Education in India ( Pre & Post Independence Era).

Unit-IV I) Critical appreciation of the following : i) Haryana Sports Department ii) I.O.C Policies for development Physical Education &Sports iii) Compulsory programme of Physical Education & Sports for School. iv) Modern Olympics v) Sports Authority of India vi) South Asian Federation Games

Unit-V I ) Foundation of Physical Education i) Biological Activity, its need, principle of use and dis-use ii) Growth and development iii) Age & Sex difference iv) Classification of Physique

REFERENCE BOOKS : 1. Charles & Bucher : Foundations of Physical Education

2. Harold M. Barrow : Man & his movement Principles of Phy. Education.

42(96) 3. J.F. Williams : Principles of Physical Education

4. Cowel & France : Philosophy and Principles of Physical Education

5. D.G. Wakharkar : Mannual of Physical Education

6. M.L.Kamesh & M.S. : Principles & History of Physical Education

Sangral

42(97) B.P.Ed Paper –II PSYCHOLOGY & SOCIOLOGY WITH REFERENCE TO PHYSICAL EDUCATION & SPORTS Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I i) Sports Psychology its meaning and nature ii) Scope, concept and goal of sports psychology iii) Phenomenon of growth iv) Heredity &Environment v) Organic and behavioral changes at various age levels vi) Individual differences and their implications in Physical Education & Sprts. Unit- II i) Emotions and their implications in Sports. ii) Hazards of emotional involvement iii) Frustretion, aggression, anger, fear, anxiety, stress and tension. iv) Nature of motivation and its need in physical education & sporst. Unit-III i) Learning & nature of learning ii) Laws of learning and learning curve iii) Some learning concepts applied to physical education and sports. iv) Relex action and automatizing of motor skills and feed back. v) Factors effecting motor learning vi) Transfer of training and its importance in learning physical skills. Unit-IV i) Sociology and its meaning and importance in physical education and sports. ii) Psycho-physical unity of human organism iii) Physical Education, Sports and Socializing institutions (Family, School, College, University and Voluntary associations) iv) Socio-psychological factors in selecting teams v) Influence of social factors on sports performance. Unit-V i) Socio- cultural forces and sports ii) Competition and cooperation in physical activity iii) Tradition and their influence on human behavior social inheritants. iv) Influence of group on the individual and vice-versa v) Physical Education & Sports as a socializing agency Reference Books 1. Frost, R.S : Psychological concepts applied to Physical Education & Coaching 2. Lawther, J.S. : Psychology of coaching, Englewood chief, N.J.Prentice Hall

42(98) B.P.Ed Paper –III ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY & KINESIOLOGY Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I i) Meaning & importance of Anatomy and Physiology ii) Structure, function and properties of living cell iii) Skeleton system – classification of bones, joints and their types. iv) Muscular system – properties and types of muscles. Unit-II i) Circulatory system – structure of Heart, blood vessels, Arteries and blood circulation ii) Blood pressure and its measurement iii) Respiratory system – Organs of respiration, structure and function iv) Physiology of respiration and mechanism of respiration v) Effects of exercise on circulatory and respiratory system. Unit-III i) Digestive system – organs of digestion, structure, function of digestive track ii) Absorption and assimilation of food. iii) Excretory system – organs of excretion, structure and function of kidney and skin. iv) Nervous system – Brain and its parts, spinal cord and reflex actions. Unit-IV i) Meaning, scope and importance of kinesiology ii) History of kinesiology iii) Terminology of various movements around the joints iv) Structural and functional classifications of muscles.

Unit-V i) Concept of balanced posture ii) Postural deformities and their corrective exercises iii) Basis concepts of force, motion equilibrium, liver & Projectiles

Reference Books 1. Harbert A Debries : Physiology of Exercise 2. Laurence E. Morchouse : Physiology of Exercise 3. Peter V.Korpevich : Physiology of Muscular Activity 4. J.S.Roses K.W.J Silson : Foundation of Anatomy & Physiology

42(99) B.P.Ed Paper – IV SPORTS MANAGEMENT Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit -I i) Meaning, importance and scope of sports management ii) Factors influencing sports management iii) Meaning & importance of teaching methods iv) Factors effecting teaching methods and various methods of teaching v) Steps of personnel and technical preparation vi) Meaning, importance and types of audio-visual aids. Unit-II i) Meaning & types of class management ii) Salient features of good class management iii) Factors effecting good class management iv) Meaning & values of lesson plan- game, Gymnestic, Atthletic and Indigenous activity v) Classification of exercises and activities and its importance. vi) Meaning & importance of tournaments. Types of tournament –knock out and league, their advance and dis-advantages. Unit-III i) Meaning, importance and principles of administration and organization ii) Factors influencing good administration iii) Qualifications and qualities of Physical Education teachers iv) Play ground, area, location, lay-out and care of sports equipments v) Need, importance, purchase of sports equipments. Unit-IV i) Need & Importance of curriculam planning ii) Time –table, factors effecting time –table , objectives, principles and precautions in preparation of time-table. iii) Intramural objectives and organization iv) Budget – importance and criteria for a good budget v) Meaning & importance, types of records and registers Unit-V i) Evaluation- Meaning need, importance and methods of evaluation ii) Characteristics of a good test iii) Supervision and inspection –meaning and methods of supervision and inspection iv) Qualities of a good supervisior v) Organization and conduct of tournaments and Athletic meets. Reference Books 1. P.M Joseph : Organization of Physical Education 2. Suraj Singh : Administration of Physical Education 3. D.G.Wakherker : Menual of Physical Education

42(100) B.P.Ed Paper – V TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING & COACHING Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note : Paper setter is required to set 10 questions, two questions from each Unit. Candidate is required to attempt five questions, selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit -I i) Importance and principles of officiating ii) Qualities of a good official iii) Relations of official with management, players, coaches and spectators iv) Duties of officials in general-pre, during and post game duties. v) Measures of improving the standard of officiating Unit-II i) Rules of games and Athletic events and their interpretation (Hockey,Football, Volley ball, Basketball, Kabaddi, Handball, Kho-kho, Table-Tennis, Badminton, Judo, Weight-lifting and Wrestling). ii) Score sheet of different games and all Athletic events iii) Layout of different play fields/grounds/court/track Unit-III i) Principles of coaching ii) Qualities, qualification and responsibilities of a coach iii) Warming up, cooling down and their physiological trends Unit-IV i) Methods of condition (Circuit training, fartlek, interval, training, weight-lifting) ii) Principles of training iii) Dopping and its effects on performance Unit-V i) Periodisation – types of periodisation ii) Preparation of training schedule iii) Psychology of competition and coaching iv) Factors effecting sports performance v) Eligibility rules of inter-collegiate and inter-university vi) Preparation of TA/DA bills.

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rules of Games and Sports by Y.M.C.A. Madras 2. The Art of Coaching by John Bunn 3. Athletic Training by Claffs. 4. Rules of Games & Sports by Lokesh Thani

42(101) B.P.Ed Paper – VI Health Education, Yoga & Recreation Time- 3 Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note : Paper setter is required to set 10 questions, two questions from each Unit. Candidate is required to attempt five questions, selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit- I i) Definition of Health Education, Health instruction, Health Supervision, health services & moral education ii) Guidance instruction in personal hygiene & medical check-up. iii) Food, its constituents, caloric value of diet. iv) Balanced diet, diet for children & sportspersons. Unit-II i) Meaning, need & importance of safety education ii) Safety in playground, home, laboratories, road, pedestrian iii) Meaning, scope, aim& objectives of first aid. iv) Need and importance of first aid in Physical Education & Sports, causes and prevention aids. Unit-III i) Meaning & objectives of Yoga. ii) Types of yoga and importance of yoga in the field of physical education & sports. iii) Cleansing processes and its role and purpose of shat karma. iv) Meaning of Asanas, typesof asanas and principles, effect, technique & benefits of following asanas. a) Meditative : Padma, Sidha, vajre b) Relaxative : Shev and Maker c) Cultural & : Bhujanga, shalabha, phanush, hal, makaya, vakre, Corrective pushchimottan, chakre, bak, mayor, garud, tab and trikna. Unit-IV ii) Meaning, objectives and types of Pranayama iii) Techniques & benefits of Ujjai, Bhastrka, Shitali, Sitkari and Bharamari. iv) Applications of Bandhas in the process of Pranayama v) Role of Hatha Yoga in the process of Physical fitness, mental health and its effect on the sports performance Unit –V i) Definition, need and scope of recreation. ii) Types of recreation – indoor, outdoor, active, passive, commercial, rural recreation. iii) Various agencies which provide recreation in India. iv) Qualities & qualifications of a good Recreation leader. v) Camping- organization of camp, facilities required for camp & different types of camps. vi) Gardening – layout and its planning vii) Hobbies : As a leisure time activity and their educational value.

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Joshi J.S : Science of Yoga 2. Fitzarlad, Gerald : Leadership in recreation education B.A.S.Barnett & Co.

42(102) PART-II PRACTICALS

: 300 Marks a) External Evaluation : 240 marks

Note:- ( i ) Practical of 240 marks will be evaluated internally as well as externally in the Following lessons. 1. Officiating and coaching of athletic : 80 marks 2. Officiating and coaching of game : 80 marks 3. Gymnastic & indigenous to activities : 80 marks

Note : (ii) There will be 20 lessons in all (five lessons in athletic) five in game, five in gymnastic and five in indigenous, activities.

All the lessons will be on the note book and student will not be allowed to sit in the examination without the completion of the note book and the certificate to this effect will be issued by the Head of the Institution. The following will be covered under Part-II (Practicals). a) Athletic (both for man & women) i) Track events : Sprints, middle, long distance and relay races. ii) Field events : Jumps and throws. b) Games :- Hockey, Football, Basketball, Handball, Wrestling (judo for women), Kabaddi, Kho-kho, Weight-lifting , Volleyball, Boxing (table-tannis for women). c) Gymnastic & Indigenous activities Mass P.T., Exercise tables, drill and marching, yogic exercises, lazium and dumbbell.

b) Internal Assessment : 60 Marks

Internal assessment will be evaluated internally by the committee consisting of principal of the College s Convener of the Committee, head of the department and activity incharge as its members. Assessment marks will be sent to the Controller of Examination in the month of March every year. Internal assessment will be based on the following criterion i) Project work (organization of competitions and college athletic meet). ii) Performance on various fundamentals skills of games. iii) Performance on various fundamentals skills of athletic events. iv) Assessment of organization of educational tour and picnic budgeting of sports material

Note :- While making the assessment on the basis of above mentioned criterion, the regularity, discipline & punctuality etc. of the students will also be taken into consideration.

42(103) Scheme of Examination for M.P.Ed (4-Semester Course) Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra -2011

M.P.Ed (Ist. Semester) Theory : 3 hours Theory Int.Assment Total Minimum pass marks Paper-I History and Principles of Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper –II Kinesiology 80 20 100 35 Paper- III Anatomy and Physiology 80 20 100 35 Paper – IV. Education Technology and Pedagogy Techniques 80 20 100 35 Paper- V Techniques of Officiating and Coaching 80 20 100 35 Paper- VI. Opt. (i) Health Education (Theory) 60 15 75 28 Or Opt. (ii) Yoga (Theory) ______Total 575 ______M.P.Ed (IInd. Semester) Paper-I History and Principles of Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-II Biomechanics in Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-III Anatomy and Physiology 80 20 100 35 Paper-IV Sports Management 80 20 100 35 Paper-V Techniques of Officiating and Coaching 80 20 100 35 Paper- VI. Opt. (i) Health Education (Theory) 60 15 75 25 (Practical) 50 20 Or Opt. (ii) Yoga (Theory)

Paper-VII Teaching and Coaching of Athletics 100 40 (Practical) Paper VIII Teaching and Coaching of Games 100 40 (Practical) Total = 825

Grant Total of both Semesters (Ist. Semester & IInd. Semester) 575+ 825= 1400

42(104) M.P.Ed –(Ist Semester) Paper-I History and Principles of Physical Education Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit: I Definition of Physical Education, Health Education and Recreation. Physical Education as a profession, Relationship of physical education with health education and recreation, need in the society. Meaning of the terms-Physical Culture, Physical Training , Games and Sports. Aims and objectives, Role of Physical Education in general, Physical Education as an art, Physical Education as a science.

Unit: II Biological Perspectives. Biological Principles of Physical Education. Growth and Development. Heredity and environment, Classification of Physique, Load- Normal load, Crest load and over load, Age and Sex differences, Individuals differences. Principles of use and disuse. Unit : III Physiological Perspectives. Benefits of exercise to the Heart and circulatory system., Benefits of exercise to the respiratory system., benefits of exercise to the muscular system, General Physiological benefits of exercise. Organic development and Neuro- muscular development. Unit: IV Psychological Prespective. Psycho-Physical Unity of Human organism, and its application in Physical activities, Psychomotor Learning, Principles, Types and factors affecting transfer of training. Psychological benefits of Physical activities.

REFERENCES 1. Khan, E.A, History of Phy. Edu; Patna Scientific Corporation (1964). 2. Kamlesh, M.L. Physical Education Facts and Foundations; Faridabad P.S publication (pvt) Ltd. (1988). 3. Kamlesh, M.L Principles & History of Phy.Edu. , Prakash Bros., Patiala, 1991. 4. Hoffman, G.J.& Harris J.C Introduction to Knesiology studying Phy.Activity,2000. 5. Revenas, R.S. (1978) Foundations of Physical Education. 6. Barrow, R.M.(1983) Man and Movement. 7. Bucher, G.A (1992) Foundations of Phy.Edu. and Sports.

42(105) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper –II Kinesiology Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I (i) Meaning, importance and scope of Kinesiology in Physical Education. (ii) Meaning and types of axis and planes. (iii) Body movements in different axis (iv) Body movements in different planes.

Unit-II (I) (i) Functional classification of muscles (ii) Method of studying the actions of muscles. (II) Neuro- mscular basis of human movement. (i) Motor unit, Receptors, Properioceptors. (ii) Reflex movement, extensor thrust reflex, flexor reflex, crossed extensor reflex, properioceptive reflex, stretch reflex. (iii) Reciprocal innervation and inhibition. Unit-III (I) Upper Extremity (i) Shoulder joint - Structure and muscle reinforcement, movement. (ii) Elbow joint - Structure, muscle reinforcement, movement. (II) Muscles at upper extremity. Deltoid, latismus dorsi, pactroralis major and minor. Unit-IV (I) Lower extremity (i) Hip Joint - Structure, muscle reinforcement, movement. (ii) Knee joint – structure, muscle reinforcement, movement (II) Muscle at lower extremity : (i) Hamstrings group (ii) Quadriceps group.

REFERENCES 1. Gowitzke, B.A and Milner, M (1988). Scientific Basis of Human Movement (3rd. ed.) Baltimore : Williams and Wilkins. 2. Groves, R and Camaine, D. (1983) . Concepts in Kinesiology .(2nd.ed) Philadelphia: Saunders College Publishing. 3. Hay, J.& Reid, J (1982). The Anatomical and Mechanical Basis of Human Motion. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice – Hall 4. Luttegens, Kathryn, Deutsch, Helga, Hamilton, Nancy. Kinesiology- Scientific Basis of Human Motion. 8th. Ed., Brown & Bench mark. 5. Rasch, P.(1989) Kinesiology and Applied Anatomy. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger. 6. Thompson, C. (1985). Manual of Structural Kinesiology. (10th. ed.) St. Louis: Times Mirror/ Mosby College Publishing.

42(106) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper- III Anatomy and Physiology Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit- I Meaning of Anatomy and Physiology and its role in Physical Education, Cell structure and its functions. Anatomy of bone and cartilage, kinds and functions of bones, Names and location of bones of human body, Types of joints, Description of diarthrodial joints, Differences in male and female skeleton with special reference to functional ability in sports.

Unit- II Gross and microscopic structure of skeletal muscles, Mechanism of muscular contraction and relaxation, Nature of neuro – muscular activity, Muscle tone, law of reciprocal innervation, Muscle work and fatigue.

Unit- III Structure of respiratory organs, Mechanism of respiration, Tissue and pulmonary respiration, Anatomy of Kidney and its functions, Lungs and skin as organs of excretion. Unit – IV Brief description of alimentary canal, digestive juices, Mechanism of digestion and absorption of food, Vitamins, Metabolism.

REFERENCES 1. Pearee Evelyn, C Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses, London, Faber and Faber Ltd., 1962. 2. Pavat.J Anatomy for students and Teachers of Physical Education, London, Edward Arnold and Co.,1959. 3. Willion. J.F Anatomy and Physiology, London, W.B.Saunders 4. Senson Wright Applied Physiology 5. Best and Taylor The Living Body, New Delhi, Asia Club House, 1960 6. Smount, C.F.V and Physiotherapy, Occupational, McDonald, RJ.S Therapy and Gymnastics, Edward Arnold Pvt.Ltd., 1969. 7. Kiober Grcy Anatomy and Physiology. 8. Stackpoles Anatomy and Physiology (6th.ed.)

42(107) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper – IV. Education Technology and Pedagogy Techniques Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note : Paper setter is required to set 2 questions from each unite I,II,III and IV and Vth. Unit consists of 10 questions of short answers distributed from all over the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 2 marks of each. Unit. I - Meaning, types and importance of teaching methods. - Factors affecting teaching methods - Presentation technique : Personal and Technical preparation - Meaning, importance, Steps and Principles of lesson plan - Lesson plan for Gymnastics Unit. II - Meaning and importance audio-visual aids in Physical Education and Sports. - Steps of using audio-visual aids, Technological devices used in Physical Education and Sports (Adobe premier, underwater camera, various measuring tools, wind gauges, foul indicators, electronic gadgets adobe photoshop, Microsoft animation, laser beam. technology, LCD display) , Power point presentation. - Teaching of Motor Skills- individual games, athletics, swimming and gymnastics. Unit- III - Meaning, importance and factors affecting of time-table. - Meaning and importance lf class management in Physical Education and Sports - Factors affecting class management - Steps of good class management - Meaning and types of command Unit- IV - Meaning and purpose of budget - Types of budget - Steps in preparing budget - Criteria of making good budget - Purchasing policy for sports materials and equipments and its principles. - Auditing of budget.

REFERENCES 1. Kannp Clydo & E : Teaching Methods for Physical Education. Mc Graw Hill Book Co.Inc. 2. Tirunurayana, C & S Hariharan : Method in Physical Education (South India Press, Karalkudi India) 3. Kamlesh M.L & Sangra. M.S : Methods in Physical Education Prakash Brothers, Jullundur . 1982. 4. Two experienced Professor : Organisation and Administration and Recreation in Physical Education. Prakash Brother. Jullundur. 1982.

42(108) 5. Wakharkar. D.C. : Manual of Physical Education. Pearl Publications, Bombay. 1967. 6. Chakraborty, S. Sports Management Delhi, Sports Publications, 1998 7. Kamlesh, M.L. Management Concept in Physical Education and Sport, New Delhi Metropolitan Book Co.Pvt. Ltd. 2000.

42(109) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper- V Techniques of Officiating and Coaching Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit- II - Measurements of courts of different game - 400mts., 200mts., track marking and field events marking - Preparation of score seats of track and field events - Principles and methods of selection of players/ team for various competitions Unit- III - Interpretation of rules and regulations of various games and sports - Duties of a official – Pre-game, during game and post – game duties. - Measures for improving the standard of officiating.

Unit- IV - Meaning and importance of coaching - Basic principles of coaching - Qualifications and qualities of a good coach - Theory and Philosophy of Coaching - Measures for improving standard of good coaching - Need of coaching

REFERENCES 1. John, V.Bunn : The Arts of Officiating Sports, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 2. John, W. Dunn : Scientific Principles of Coaching, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J 3. H.C.Buch : Rules of Games and Sports 4. Be Clar : Science of Coaching, A.S. Barhas and Co. , New York. 5. R.L.Anand : Playing Field Manual, NIS Publication

42(110) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper- VI. Opt. (i) Health Education Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 75 Theory : 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit :I - Meaning and concept of health and wellness. - Dimensions of Health and Wellness - Importance of health - Factor affecting health and wellness Unit-II - Meaning and concept of Health Education - Aims and objectives of Health Education - Need and importance of Health Education - Principles of Health Education- (i) Alcohol and its effects on Health, Family, Society and Country (ii) Smoking and Tobacco Chewing and its effect on Health Unit-III - Personal care and Hygiene- care of skin, mouth, nails, clothing, bathing - Importance or rest, sleep and exercise - School Health Programmes- Objectives, Health appraisal, Healthful School environment and Health records, First Aid and safety measure - Role of Physical Education Teacher in maintaining the good health of children Unit-IV - Meaning and importance of Methods of Education in Health - Various methods in importing health instructions - Health Organizations –World Health Organization (WHO) Red Cross Society.

REFERENCES

1. Physical Education & Health. (Dr. A.K.Uppal, Dr. G.P.Gautam) 2. Physical and Health Education (Mr. V.D.Sharma & Granh Singh) 3. Yoga & Health Education (Dr. R.K.S.Dagarm Dr. Shiv Kumar Chauhan and S.S Mann) 4. Turner and Mouison: Personnel and Community Health. 5. Dehl : Healthful Living, McGraw Hill 6. Daiymple: Foundations of Health 7. Obertaufer : School Health Education 8. Jobs Sutten : Health for Effective living, N.Y., Mcgraw Hill Books Co., Inc.,1958.

42(111) M.P.Ed (Semester –I) Paper- VI. Opt. (ii Yoga Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 75 Theory : 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note : Paper setter is required to set 2 questions form each unite I,II,III,IV and Vth. Unit consists of 10 questions of short answers distributed from all over the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit having 10 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 2 of each short questions. Unit:I - Meaning and Philosophy of Yoga - Aims and objectives of Yoga - Role of Yoga in Physical Education and Sports - Contribution of Yoga for the modern society Unit-II - Types of Yoga- Hath Yoga, Karma Yoga, Laya Yoga, Dhyan Yoga, Bhakti Yoga, Raj Yoga, Gyan Yoga, Tantra Yoga, Astang Yoga and Sanyas Yoga. Unit-III - Meaning and types of Asana - Cultural Asana-Bhujanga Asana, Shalabha Asana, Dhanur Asana, Hala Asana, Matsa Asana, Ardhmatsyendra Asana, Paschimottana Asana, Ustra Asana, - Meditative Asana : Padmasana, Sidhasana, Sukhasana - Relexative Asana : Shavasana, Makarasana, Vajrasana Unit-IV. - Meaning and types of Pranayama – Bhastrika, Shitkari, Bharamari, Shitali - Techniques and Benefits of Pranayama - Scientific approach of Pranayama

REFERENCE 1. Introduction of Yoga (Dr. Pitamber Jha) 2. Yogasharam Pranayam (Swami Kavalayanad) 3. Asanas and Pranayama by Swami Kuvalyanand 4. Yoga for Health, happiness and peace by Yoga Acharya Prakash Dev. 5. Yoga Method of Reintegration by Alam Danial 6. Yoga Personal Hygiene by Shri Yogendra 7. Yoga for Every Man by Desmonds Dubee 8. Massage and medical Gymanstics by Mary V.Lacc.

42(112) M.P.Ed II nd. Semester

Paper- I History and Principles of Physical Education Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note : Note : Paper setter is required to set 2 questions from each unite I,II,III and IV and Vth. Unit consists of 10 questions of short answers distributed from all over the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 2 marks of each.

Unit- I Sociological Perspectives. Influence of Culture and Traditions on participation in Physical activities. Physical Education as a socializing agency and social recognition, Social facilitation and its implications in sports, Sports and social change., Group dynamics. Influence of the group on individual competition and co-operation. Sports for international brotherhood and world peace. Unit-II Philosophical Perspectives. Idealism and Physical Education., Pragmatism and Physical Education., Naturalism and Physical Education ., Existentialism and physical education Theories of play. Physical Education and Sports as a need of the modern society. Future prospective in Physical Education and Sports (Teaching, Coaching, Sportsmen, Sports journalist, Physiotherapist). Unit-III Historical Perspectives. History of ancient and modern India, Physical Education in ancient Greece., Physical Education in Sparta., Physical Education in Athens., Contribution of ancient Greece to modern Physical Education. Great Britain, Germany, Japan., U.S.A and Russia. Unit-IV Modern Olympic Games and ancient Olympic Games. Agencies and International Competitions Promoting Physical Education and Sports. S.A.I, N.S.N.I.S., Sports Federation. National Sports Awards, Asian games, S.A.F.E Games, Common Wealth Games. Recent trends in Physical Education. National sports policy.

REFERENCES

1. Khan, E. A, History of Phy.Edu; Patna Scientific Corporation (1964). 2. Kamlesh, M.L .Physical Education Facts and Foundation; Faridabad P.S. publication (pvt) Ltd. (1988) 3. Kamlesh, M.L. Principles & History of Phy.Edu., Prakash Bros., Patiala, 1991. 4. Hoffman, G.J.& Harris J.C Introduction to Knesiology studying Phy.Activity,2000

42(113) 5. Revenas, R.S. (1978) Foundation of Physical Education 6. Barrow, R.M.(1983) Man and Movement. 7. Bucher, G.A.(1992) Foundations of Phy.Edu. and Sports.

42(114) Paper-II Biomechanics in Physical Education (Semester –II) Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit- I Meaning, importance and scope of Biomechanics in Phy. Education. - Introduction of Biomechanics Instrumentations. - Overview of instrumentation and its uses. - Videography and computer assisted analysis. - Electromyography - Electrogonimetery Unit- II Basic Mechanical principles. - Distance, displacement, velocity, acceleration. - Motion and its types. - Newton’s laws of Motion - Force and its various types i.e centripetal, centrifugal, friction, reaction forces and fluid forces. - Mass and weight. - Gravity, center of gravity, line of gravity. Unit-III Body balance and equilibrium - Lever, types and their advantages. - Flotation and buoyance - Projectile - Spin Unit- IV - Mechanical analysis of walking, running, jumping and throwing. - Work, power and energy. REFERENCES

1. Gowitzke, B.A and Milner, M (1988). Scientific Basis of Human Movement. (3rd. ed.) Baltimore : Williams and Wilkins. 2. Groves, R and Camaine, D.(1983) . Concepts in Kinesiology.(2nd.ed.) Philadelphia : Saunders College Publishing. 3. Hay, J & Reid, J (1982) . The Anatomical and Mechanical Bases of Human Motion. Englewood Cliffs : Prentice – Hall 4. Luttegens, Kathryn, Deutsch, Helga, Hamilton, Nancy. Kinesiology – Scientific Basis of Human Motion. 8th.Ed., Brown & Bench mark. 5. Rasch, P.(1989). Kinesiology and Applied Anatomy. Philadelphia : Lea & Febiger. 6. Thompson, C.(1985). Manual of Structural Kinesiology. (10th. ed.) St. Louis : Times Mirror/ Mosby College Publishing. 7. Grabiner. M.D. Current Issue is Biomechanics, New Delhi, 1993. 8. Mood, S.D., Beyond Biomechanics, New York : Taylor, 1996. 9. Shaw, D. Mechanical Bases of Biomechanics, Delhi : Sport Pub. 2000 10. Shaw, D. Mechanical Bases of Biomechanics, London- A & C, 2003

42(115) Paper – III Anatomy and Physiology (Semester – II) Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit- I Composition of blood and its functions, Blood pressure systolic and Disystolic Blood pressure, Factors affecting blood pressure, Measurement of blood pressure.

Unit- II Anatomy of heart, Systemic, Pulmonary and coronary circulations, Mechanism of circulation, Heart rate, stroke volume, cardiac output, cardiac reserve capacity, Cardiac cycle.

Unit. III The Neuron and the motor Unit, Motor and sensory impulses, Locations, Anatomy and functions of different parts of brain, Spinal cord and its functions, Reflex action and Reflex arc, Concept of Receptors.

Unit. IV Meaning of endocrine glands, Locations and functions of the following endocrine Glands i.e Pituitary gland, Thyroid glands, Parathyroid glands, Adrenal glands.

REFERENCES

1. Pearee Evelyn, C Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses, London, Faber and Feber Ltd., 1962.

2. Pavat.J Anatomy for Students and Teachers of Physical Education, London,Edward Arnold and Co.,1959.

3. Willion . J.F. Anatomy and Physiology, London, W.B.Saunders.

4. Senson Wright Applied Physiology

5. Best and Taylor The Living Body, New Delhi, Asia Club House,1960.

6. Smount, C.F.V and Physiotherapy, Occupational, McDonald, RJ.S Therapy and Gymnastics, Edward Arnold Pvt. Ltd., 1969.

7. Kiober Grcy Anatomy and Physiology.

8. Stackpoles Anatomy and Physiology (6th. ed.)

42(116) Paper—IV. Sports Management (Semester-II) Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-III - Lay out of Physical Education Facilities, common and special. - Need and importance of facilities and equipments. - Meaning, types and importance of tournaments. - Merits and demerits of knock – out and league tournaments. - Preparation of fixture on simple knock – out and league bases.

Unit-IV - Meaning importance and factors affecting Physical Education curriculum. - Principles of curriculum construction and criteria for curriculum contents. - Meaning, importance and types of evaluation. - Principles of evaluation of Physical Education programme.

REFERENCES 1. Kannp Clydo & E : Teaching Methods for Physical Education. Mc Graw Hill Book Co.Inc. 2. Tirunurayana, C.& S Hariharan : Method in Physical Education (South India Press, Karalkudi India) 3. Kamlesh M.L. & Sangra.M.S. : Methods in Physical Education Prakas Brothers, Jullundur. 1982. 4. Two experienced Professors : Organisation and Administration and Recreation in Physical Education. Prakash Brothers. Jullundur.1982. 5. Wakharkar. D.C : Manual of Physical Education. Pearl Publications, Bombay.1967. 6. Chakraborty, S. Sports Management Delhi, Sports Publications, 1998. 7. Kamlesh, M.L.Management Concept in Physical Education and Sport, New Delhi Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd.2000.

42(117) Paper-V. Techniques of Officiating and Coaching. (Semester-II) Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit- I - Meaning and types of warming up and cooling down - Need and importance of warming up and cooling down - Physiological effects of warming up and cooling down on the body

Unit- II - Meaning and importance of conditioning - Various methods of conditioning ( Interval training, Plyometric training, repetition training, fort lake training and circuit training). - Psychological training of develop skill ability and execution ability.

Unit-III - Ergogenic aids- Meaning types and its importance - Doping and its effects on performance - Doping and health - Why drugs are prohibited in games and sports

Unit-IV - Officiating and coaching of activities - Activities for men and women – Games – football, Basket ball, Badminton, Kabaddi, Volleyball, Handball, Hockey, Kho-Kho, Wrestling, Tennis. - Track and field – Relay races, 4 X 100 mts, 4 X 400 mts, Discus, Javelin and Hammer Throws, jumps – High and long jumps, Triple jump. Preparation of TA/DA bills and knowledge of eligibility rules.

REFERENCES

1. John, V,Bunn : The Arts of officiating Sports, Prentice – Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 2. John, W.Dunn : scientific Principles of Coaching , Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 3. H.C.Buck : Rules of Games and Sports. 4. Be Clar : Science of Coaching, A.S. Barhas and Co., New York. 5. R.L. Anand : Playing Field Manual , NIS Publication.

42(118) M.P.Ed (Semester –II) Paper- VI. Opt. (i) Health Education Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 75 Theory : 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Note : Paper setter is required to set 2 questions form each unite I,II,III,IV and Vth. Unit consists of 10 questions of short answers distributed from all over the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit having 10 marks and the Vth.unit is compulsory for all consisting 2 marks of each short question. Unit:I - Meaning and types of Health Problems - Organizational and Administrative setup of Health System India- Center State and District Levels. - Role of Social organizations in achieving Health Objectives - Health Hazards and their Precaution Unit-II - Meaning and definition of balanced diet - Caloric Values of food for competitive sports - First Aid and Emergency Care Unit-III - Posture- Meaning and Importance of good posture in Sport - Postural Deformities and their Remedial Measures- Kyphosis, Lordosis, Scolosis, Flat foot, knock knees and bow legs. Unit-IV - Communicable disease, Modes of transmission control and prevention of the following diseases:- Cholera, Malaria, Small-pox, Typhoid, Influenza and Dysentery. - Aids – Meaning and its Causes - Control and Prevention of Aids.

Practical Marks : 50 First Aid : Sling bandages, Artificial respiration, Transportation of the injured persons, settings and bites of animals, fractures, Heat stroke, control of bleeding, cuts and wounds.

REFERENCES

42(119) M.P.Ed (Semester –II) Paper- VI. Opt. (ii) Yoga Time : Three Hours Total Marks : 75 Theory : 60 Int. Assessment : 15

Unit-II Bandhas, Mudras- Meaning, techniques and their benefits. - Bandhas : Mul Bandha, Jalandhar Bandha and Uddiyana Bandha - Mudras : Ashwani Mudras, Viprit Karni and Yoga Mudra

Unit-III Yoga Therapy- Role of Yogabhyas in keeping Mentaland Physical Care - Diagnosis of the following diseases through Yoga – Asthama, Zondis, Low and High B..Artharitis, Nabhi talana, Back and Knee Pain, Diabetes

Unit-IV Relationship between Physical Education Sports and Yoga - Effects of various Asana and different systems of the body, Role of Yoga Asana in increasing performance in sports.

Practical Marks :50 1. Note Book Marks : 05 II. Any ten Asanas out of the following : Marks : 15 (i) Yogmydra (ii) Paschimottasana (iii) Dhanurasana. (iv) Ardha-Matsyendrasana (v) Padmasana (vi) Sarvangasana (vii) Shavasana (viii) Bhujangasana (ix) Chajrasana (x) Suryanamaskara (xi) Halasana (xii) Super-Vajrasana (xiii) Hanuman Asana (xiv) Salab Asana (xv) Tirkon Asana (xvi) Sirish Asana III. Any two techniques of Pranayama- Marks : 10 (i) Bastrika (ii) Ujjai (iii) Shitali (iv) Bharmari IV. Any two kriya of the following Marks : 10 (i) Neti (ii) Dhotti (iii) Nauli (iv) Basti (v) Taratak (vi) Uddiyana Bandha V. Viva-Voce Marks :10

REFERENCES 1. Introduction of Yoga (Dr. Pitamber Jha) 2. Yogasharam Pranayam (Swami Kavalayanad) 3. Asanas and Pranayama by Swami Kuvalyanand 4. Yoga for Health, happiness and peace by Yoga Acharya Prakash Dev. 5. Yoga Method of Reintegration by Alam Danial 6. Yoga Personal Hygiene by Shri Yogendra 7. Yoga for Every Man by Desmonds Dubee 8. Massage and medical Gymanstics by Mary V.Lacc.

42(120) Syllabus for Practical papers –(Semester-II)

Paper-VII. Teaching and Coaching of Athletics Marks :100

1. General and specific warming up 2. Teaching of Athletic events (Track and field events) 3. marking of Track and Field events 4. Knowledge and duties of various officials 5. Preparation of five Supervisory Athletic Lesson Plan in the Note-Book 6. Project work on Track and Field- History, various events records , conduct of Athletic meet (Project-Note Book) Marks :25 Paper VIII. Teaching and Coaching of Games Marks :100 1. General and specific warming up 2. Teaching of fundamental skills 3. Teaching of lead-up Games 4. Marking of concerned Play fields/events 5. Preparation of five supervisory game lesson plan in the Note-Book 6. Knowledge and duties of the officials of the concern games 7. Project work on concerned game- History, various techniques, records, and conduct of the game (Project-Note Book) Marks : 25

42(121)

Scheme of Examination for M.P.Ed (4-Semester Course) Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra -2011

M.P.Ed (3rd. SEMESTER) Theory : 3 hours Theory Int.Assment Total Minimum pass marks Paper- I Sports Psychology 80 20 100 35 Paper-II Statistical Techniques in Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-III Research Methodology in Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-IV Sports Medicine 80 20 100 35 Paper-V Fundamental of Sports Training 80 20 100 35

Paper- VI Options 80 20 100 35

Opt. (i) Supervision in Physical Education Or Opt. (ii) Sports Sociology Or Opt. (iii) Project report and Seminar along with power point presentation related to dissertation ( Treated practical examination) ______Total = 600

M.P.Ed (4th. SEMESTER ) Theory : 3 hours Theory Int.Assment Total Minimum pass marks

Paper-I Sports Psychology 80 20 100 35 Paper-II Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-III Research Methodology in Physical Education 80 20 100 35 Paper-IV Sports Medicine 80 20 100 35 Paper-V Scientific Principle of Sports Training 80 20 100 35

Paper-VI Options : 80 20 100 35

Opt. (i) Supervision in Physical Education Or Opt. (ii) Sports Sociology Or Opt. (iii) Dissertation Paper-VII Class Room Theory Lesson (Practical) 100 Paper-VIII Teaching and Coaching Athletic (Practical) 100 Paper- IX Teaching and Coaching of Games (Practical) 100 ______Total = 900

Grant Total ( Semester 3rd. & 4th. ) = 600 + 900 = 1500 Marks

42(122) M.P.Ed- III Semester Paper-Ist. (Sport Psychology) Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e unit Ist, IInd. ,IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The Unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit(I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit(I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit-I Introduction to Sport Psychology : i) Meaning & Scope of sport Psychology ii) Importance of Sport Psychology to - Teachers - Coaches and trainers iii) Psycho-physical unity and physical education Unit- II Heredity and Environment : - Meaning of Heredity, - Mechanism and Laws of Heredity - Meaning and types of environment - Heredity, Environment and Athletic Performance Unit-III Learning : i) Concept and meaning of learning ii) Laws of learning, Learning curve iii) Theories of learning - Thorndike’s (Trial and Error Theory) - Pavlov (Learning by Conditioning ) - Gestalt (Learning by insight) iv) Transfer of training v) Principles and Conditions of motor skill learning Unit-IV Personality : i) Concept and definition of personality. ii) Theories of personality - Type theory - Trait theory - Theory of Psycho-analysis iii) Counseling and mental health of Participants and Athletes -Concept of counseling - Counseling Process - Exercise and sport as a promoter of good mental health - Principles of mental health

REFERENCE

1. Bhatia, Hans Raj, Test Book of Education Psychology, Delhi: Macmillan,2003.

2. Rouben.B.Frost : Psychological concepts applied to Physical Education and Coaching, Edition, Wesley Publishing Co.London.

42(123) 3. Dridge & Hung : Psychological foundations of Education. Harper and Row Publishers. 4. Jain, D.,Introduction to Psychology, New Delhi: K.S.K,2003. 5. Kamlesh, M.L.Education Sports Psychology, New Delhi, Friends Pub.,2006. 6. Kamlesh,M.L.,Key Ideas in Sport Psychology, New Delhi, Friends Pub.2007 Kutty, S.K Foundations of Sports & Exercise Psychology, New Delhi: Sports,2004.

7. Robert.S.Weinberg - Foundations of Sports and Exercise Psychology (Third Edition) Daniel Gould

8. Jack H.Liewellyn - Psychology of Coaching : Theory and Application (Surjeet Publisher New Judy A. Blucker Delhi)

9. Jashwant Kaur Virk - Psychology of Teaching and Learning (Twenty First Century Publication Pardeep Kumar Sahu Patiala.2008)

42(124) M.P.Ed- III Semester Paper - II (Statistical Techniques in Physical Education)) Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e. unit Ist. , IInd. ,IIIrd., IVth. and Vth.. The Unit Ist , IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit(I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit(I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit. –I Meaning of statistics. Need and importance of statistics in Physical Education, Meaning of “Data” , Methods of organizing Data through Frequency Distribution. Meaning of the Measures of Central Tendency, Computation of Measures of Central Tendency i.e. Mean, Median and Mode.

Unit-II Meaning of Variability, Computation of Measures of variability: Range, Quartile - Deviation, Average Deviation and Standard Deviation. Meaning of term Percentile, Computation of Percentile & Quartiles. Meaning of Percentile Rank, Computation of Percentile Rank.

Unit - III Meaning of Normal Probability Curve, characteristics and properties of Normal Curve. Application of N.P.C, Meaning of Skewness and kurtosis. Calculation of various combination of Heads and Tails. Meaning and Types of Linear Correlation. Computation of Correlation Coefficient with Product Movement Method and Rank Difference Method.

Unit – IV Meaning and advantage of Graphical Representation of Data . Principle of Graphical Representation of Data. Histogram, Frequency Polygon, Cumulative-Frequency Graph, Bar-Diagram and Pie Diagram.

Meaning of two –tailed and one tailed test of significance, computing significance of difference between two means with t – Test (independent samples).

REFERENCES 1. Clarke.HH.The Application of Measurement in Health and Physical Education,1992. 2. Clarke,David H.and Clake H.Hares N. Research Process in Health Education Physical Education and Recreation . Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall, Inc.1986.

42(125) 3. Shaw. Dhananjoy. Fundamental statistics in Physical Education & Sports sciences, sports publication,2007. 4. Margaret J. Safrit : Introduction to Measurement in Physical Education and Exercise Science, Time Mirror/ Mosy, College Publishing St. Louis. Toronte Bosion (2Nd. Edition-1998. 5. Morey E. Garrett : Statistics in Psychology and Educated, David Meka Company Inc. 6. Devinder K. Kansal : Test and Measurement in Sports and Physical Education, D.V.S.Publications, Kalkaji, New Delhi –110019.

42(126) M.P.Ed- III Semester Paper-III (Research Methodology in Physical Education)

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

UNIT: I Meaning and Definition of research , Characteristics of good research, Need of Research in Physical Education and Sports, Fundamental Versus Applied Research, Nature of Research in Physical Education and Sports, Scope Research in Physical Education and Sports, Qualities of a good research worker. The Problem: Definition, selection of Problem, Personal Criteria, Social Criteria, Research Criteria, Locating Problem, Problem areas in Physical Education and Sports.

UNIT: II Research Literature: Location of the research material. Indexes, books, bibliographic, reviews and Abstracts, Critical literature and allied literature. Steps in reviewing literature (note taking, scanning and skimming), Reference and foot notes, Direct and indirect library sources.

UNIT: III Tools of Research: Observation, Interviews, questionnaires, opinionaires or attitude scales, Psychological Tests and Personality Inventories, Type of Psychological Tests, Sports specific Psychological Tests, Sociometric Techniques, Photography and cinematography.

UNIT: IV What is Sampling, Selection of sample, the concept of Randomness, Type of Samples, Size of the Sample, and Theory of sampling. Hypothesis: Meaning, importance, Sources, types (Declarative, Probable and questions) form, Characteristics of good hypothesis.

Reference 1. Best J.W.Research in Education, Prentice Hall Inc. : Delhi-1982 2. Clarke, H.David., Research Processes in Physical Education , Recreation & Health Prentice Hall Inc.1985. 3. Thomas Jerry R. and Nelson Jack K., Research Methods, Physical Activity. Human Kinetics Champaign, 1996.

42(127) 4. Weimer, Jon, Research Techniques in Human Engineering. Prentice Hall: New Jersy.1994. 5. C.V.Good : Methods of Research , Appleton Century Crofts Inc., New York,1954. 6. W.R.Mouly : Educational Research Introduction, David Making CO. Inc. Yew York, 1975. 7. J.W.Best : Research in Education, Prentice Hall, 1980. 8. D.H. Clarke : Research Processes in Physical Education, Recreation and Health , Premice Hall, 1970.

42(128) M.P.Ed- III Semester Paper – IV (Sports Medicine)

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I Meaning and concept of sports medicine, scope of sports medicine in physical education and sports. History of Sports Medicine in India. Prevention of sports injuries. Role of Physical Educators and Coaches in the prevention of sports injuries. Pre-conditioning injury prevention exercises and drives Static Stretching exercises. Therapeutic exercise and their classification.

Unit-II Sports Injuries: - Terminology and classification of common sports soft tissue injuries, Pathological changes in sprains, strain and contusion and their management. Regional injuries and their management- injuries of head, ears, eyes, nose, back, shoulders, elbows, hand, abdomen, thighs, knee, leg and ankle.

Unit-III Rehabilitation procedures of sports injuries, Principles of rehabilitation of injuries, Therapeutic modelties i.e cryotherapy , hydrotherapy, electrotherapy and lesser therapy. Massage and its techniques.

Unit- IV. Physiology of exercise, short and long term effects of exercise on muscular tissues, Physiological principles of development of strength, endurance, speed and flexibility. Heart role and exercise. Threshold for training effects on heart, Cardiac reserve capacity, blood pressure and exercise. Lungs ventilation during rest and exercise, change in lungs diffusions during muscular activities.

References : 1. Armstrong and Tuckler : Injuries in Sports, London, Staples Press, 1964 2. Bolan, J.P. : Treatment and Prevention of Athletic Injuries. The Rasch, P.J Inter-state Printers and Publishers, 1967. 3. Morehouse, L.E and : Sports Medicine for Trainers, Philadephia, W.B. Saunder CO.,1963 Rasch, P.J. 4. Ryans Allan : Medical Care of the Athlete, McGraw Hill. 5. Morchouse & Miller : Physiology of Exercise 6. Falls : Exercise Physiology 7. Karpovitch : Physiology of Muscular activity 8. Pande, P.K. “ Know How Sports Medicine?” AP Publications, Jalandhar

42(129) M.P.Ed- III Semester Paper – V (Fundamental of Sports Training)

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

UNIT - I SPORTS TRAINING • Meaning and importance of Training • Aim and objectives of sports Training • Characteristics of sports Training • Principles of sports Training • Functions of Science of Training • General Training means and methods. UNIT – II TRAINING LOAD, ADAPTATION AND RECOVERY • Meaning and factors/ parameters of Load • Judgment of Load • Load and adaptation • Relationship between load and recovery • Factors affecting pace of recovery • Means of recovery • Overload • Causes and symptoms of overload Tackling of overload. UNIT – III VARIOUS TRAINING METHODS • Interval Training Method • Repetition Training Method • Continuous Training Method • Circuit Training Method • Fartlek Training Method • Weight Training Method UNIT – IV Planning of Sports Training Planning • Meaning and importance of Planning • Principles of Planning • Types of Plan : -Training conception - Macro Cycle -Meso Cycle - Micro Cycle / Training session plan)

42(130) REFERENCES

SPORTS TRAINING

1. Allan W. Jakson & James R. Morrow (1999), “Physical Activity for Health and Fitness”. Human Kinetics. 2. American College of Sports Medicine (1991), “Guidelines for Exercises Testing and Prescription” ed. (Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger). 3. Annette, Lang Morning Strength Workouts. Human Kinetics, Champaign, llc, USA, 2007. 4. B.Don, Frnak, Edward J. Howley (1995), “Fitness Leaders Handbook”. (Human Kinetics) 5. Claude Bouchard, Roy J. Stephard, Thomas Stephens (1993), “Physical Activity, Fitness and Consensus Statement” (Human Kinetics Publishers). 6. Craig A. Wrisberg, Sports Skill Instruction for Coaches. Human Kinetics, Champaign, iic, USA 7. Cratty, B. Perceptual and Motor Development in Infants and Children. Pretice Hall, 1989. 8. Daniel, D. Arnhjeim & William E. Prentice “Principles of Sports Training” Morby - Year Book I Louis, 1993. 9. David C. Nieman (2000), “Fitness and Sports Medicine: A Health Relatied Approach” 3rd Ed. (M. Publicity Company). 10. David N. Camaione (1993), “Fitness Management”. (Wels Brown & Benlr Mark). 11. David R. Lamb (1984), “Physiology of Exercise, Responses and Adaptation” 2nd ed. (Mac Publicity Company). 12. David, Sandler, Sports Power, human Kinetics, Champaign, iic., USA, 2005. 13. Donald, Chu. Jumping into Plyo metrics. Human Kinetics, Champaign, ILL., 1998. 14. Fuoss Donald E., & Troppmann, Robert J. Effective Coaching (Apsychological Approach), Mac. Publishing Company & Collier Macmillan Publishers, 1985. 15. Hardayal Singh, Science of Sports Training, ND; D.a.V. Pub., 1993. 16. Herre, D., Principals of Sports Training, London: Grafion Book, 1982.

42(131) M.P.Ed IIIrd. Semester Paper- VI Opt.(i) Supervision in Physical Education

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e Ist., IInd. IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The unit Ist., IInd. IIIrd., IVth consists of two questions from each unit (I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth. consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit (I to IV) and unit Vth. is compulsory for all.

Unit-I (i) Meaning of Supervision (ii) Scope and Importance of Supervision in Physical Education and Sports. (iii) Factors influencing the supervision (iv) Guiding principles of supervision Planning and operating the Supervisory Programme (i) Need and Importance of planning and operating the Supervisory Programme in Physical Education and Sports. (ii) Principles of Planning and Operating Unit-II Supervision and Leadership (i) Duties pertaining to administration and supervision (ii) Duties pertaining to facilities, equipment, supply, special service and professional growth. (iii) Meaning and functions of leadership (iv) Guidelines for effective leadership in Physical Education and sports. Unit-III Method in Supervision (i) Visitation – purpose, types , planning the visitation programme, visitation procedure and follow up. (ii) Conference- Individual and group conference, situation requiring conferences, planning of Conference, Conduct of conference. Record of meetings. Curriculum : (i) Meaning and factors influencing the Physical Education Curriculum (ii) Principles of curriculum development (iii) Supervisor’s role in co-operative curriculum development and its revision

Unit-IV

42(132) (i) Demonstration – Meaning and purpose of Demonstration, advantages and disadvantages. Types and preparation for demonstration. Conducting the demonstration, follow up. (ii) Bulletins- Meaning and purpose, advantages and limitations, kinds and sources of material of a bulletin, characteristics and evaluation of bulletin. Evaluation : (i) Meaning and purpose of Evaluation (ii) Types of Evaluation (iii) Principles of Evaluation of Physical Education Programme

REFERENCE

1. George, D. Butler : Introduction to community Recreation 2. J.B. Nash : Philosophy of Recreation and Leisure 3. H.Dan Corbin : Recreation Leadership 4. John, L. Hutchinson : Principles of Recreation 5. Meyer, H.D and Brightbill, C.K. : Community Recreation’ 6. Carl. E. Wilgoose : The curriculum in Physical Education Boston University, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. Jersey.

42(133) M.P.Ed- II I Semester Paper-VI. Opt.(ii) Sport Sociology

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note:- The question paper consists of five units i.e. unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The unit Ist. IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit (I to IV) carrying 15 marks each an unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit (I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit-I :Introduction to Sport Sociology. i) Meaning and concept of sport sociology. ii) Sociology of sport as a separate discipline. iii) Implications of social theories in sports iv) Psycho-Social implications and impact of organized youth sport.

Unit- II : Sport and Culture i) Meaning of culture, difference between culture an civilization. ii) Structure of sport culture. iii) Functions of sport culture. iv) Sport as a cultural phenomenon.

Unit- III: Social roots of sport society. i) Definitions of society. ii) Society is a web of social relationship. iii) Place of sport and games in different societies. iv) Role of Physical Education in the context of social problems.

Unit-IV : Sport and Socialization i) Relationship of sports with social institutions. ii) Family, Kinship, School, Education system, Peer groups, Voluntary association. iii) Sport and stratification (Castes, Genders, Age). iv) Social ethics and sport. - Attitude towards activity and sport - Women and Sport - Organized sports programmes for children’s.

REFERENCE 1. Bhusan, V. and Sachdeva, An introduction to Sociology, Delhi: Kitab, 2003. 2. Jain, Rachna, Sport Sociology, New Delhi : KSK, 2005. 3. Kanwal jeet, S., Sport Sociology, ND: Friends Pub. 2000. 4. Yadvinder Singh, Sociology in Sport, Sports Publication, 7/26 Ansari road, Darya Ganj New Delhi -110 002. 5. Sharma, R. N. Urban Sociology, ND: Surjeet Pub., 1993. 6. Singh, Bhupinder, Sports Sociology, New Delhi : Friends, 2004. 7. IGNOU, The Study of Society – Understanding Sociology, Delhi-IGNOU, 2007. 42(134) 8. Turner, B., Cambridge Dictionary of Sociology, U.K., Cambridge, U.N. Press., 2006. 9. Prof. A Yobu, Sociology of Sports, Friends Publications (India) 101,4787/23, Ansri road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi – 110 002 Paper- VIth. Option- (iii) Project report and Seminar alongwith Marks = 80 power point presentation related to dissertation Int. Assessment =20 (Treated practical examination). Total = 100

Note : Every candidate who offers Dissertation shall be required one copy of his/her project report related to dissertation. The last date for receipt of project report in the office of the Chairman, Dept. of Physical Education, shall be 15 December of the IIIrd. Semester. However, after expiry of above date the extension in the date shall be permissible will penalty as laid down in the General Rules of the Examination. The project report evaluated at the spot by the external examiner.

42(135) M.P. Ed- IVth Semester

M.P.Ed- IV Semester Paper-Ist. ( Sport Psychology) Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e unit Ist, IInd., IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The Unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit(I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit (I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit- I i)Psychology as a Science ii) Methods of Sport Psychology - Observation - Experimental - Survey Method - Psycho- Analysis iii ) Psychological skills in sport - Meaning and concept o psychological skills - Various psychological skills • Attention • Concentration • Imagery Unit-II- - Definition, Concept of Growth and Development - Principles of growth and development - Stages of growth and development ( Infancy,Childhood, Adolescence ) Physical, mental, social and emotional characteristics

Unit-III Motivation : i) Meaning ,concept and types of motivation ii) Theories of motivation (drive, need, instinct theories). iii) Achievement motivation iv) Goal-setting in sport

Unit-IV Emotion, Anxiety and Stress i) Nature, Characteristics and Classification of Emotions. ii) Definition and types of anxiety iii) Effect of anxiety on sports performance iv) Meaning, sources of stress and how stress affects performance. v) Effective stress management strategies such as relaxation techniques : Yoga , breathing, imagery and meditation.

42(136) REFERENCE

1. Bhatia, Hans Raj, Test Book of Education Psychology, Delhi: Macmillan,2003.

2. Rouben.B.Frost : Psychological concepts applied to Physical Education and Coaching, Edition, Wesley Publishing Co.London.

3. Dridge & Hung : Psychological foundations of Education. Harper and Row Publishers. 4. Jain, D.,Introduction to Psychology, New Delhi: K.S.K,2003. 5. Kamlesh, M.L.Education Sports Psychology, New Delhi, Friends Pub.,2006. 6. Kamlesh,M.L.,Key Ideas in Sport Psychology, New Delhi, Friends Pub.2007 Kutty, S.K Foundations of Sports & Exercise Psychology, New Delhi: Sports,2004.

7. Robert.S.Weinberg - Foundations of Sports and Exercise Psychology (Third Edition) Daniel Gould

8. Jack H.Liewellyn - Psychology of Coaching : Theory and Application (Surjeet Publisher New Judy A. Blucker Delhi)

9. Jashwant Kaur Virk - Psychology of Teaching and Learning (Twenty First Century Publication Pardeep Kumar Sahu Patiala.2008)

42(137) M.P.Ed- IV Semester Paper – II (Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education))

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e unit Ist., IInd. ,IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The Unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit(I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit(I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit -1 Meaning of Test, Evaluation and Measurement. Importance of test in Physical education and sports. Criteria for test selection - a) Technical Standards b) Practical Standards. Administration of Test –a) Advance Preparations b) Duties During Testing c) Duties after testing.

Unit – 2 Meaning of Motor Ability, Test of Motor Ability – a) Barrow Motor Ability test b) Scott Motor Ability

Test. Test of Fitness and Endurance – a) AAHPER Youth Fitness Test b) Harvard Step Test.

Unit – 3 Test of specific sports skill - Badminton - French Short Serve and Clear Test. Basket Ball – Johnson Basketball Test. Hockey – Schmithals-French Test in Field Hockey. Soccer - Warner Test for Soccer skills.

Unit – 4 Meaning of Psychomotor Test. Meredith Physical Growth Records and Iowa Posture Test. Broer – Miller Forehand and Backhand Drive test for Tennis skills. Petry Volleyball Serve Test.

REFERENCES 1. Cohen, R.J.and M.E Swerdhik, Psychological Testing and Assessment : An Introduction to Test and Measurement,1999. 2. Kansal, D.K.Text Book of Test, Measurement, Evaluation and sports selection for all sports and spiritual sciences Publication, New Delhi,2008.

42(138) 3. Lacy, A.C.and Douglas N. Hastad, Measurement & Evaluation in Physical Education and Exercise Science,2003. 4. Tritschler, K.a, Barrow & McGee’s, practical Measurement and assessment,2000.

42(139) M.P.Ed- IV Semester Paper-III ( Research Methodology in Physical Education) Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

UNIT: I Historical Research: Meaning, values, scope, characteristics, steps, primary and secondary sources, Internal and external criticism, pitfalls and reports. Normative/Survey Research and case study : Meaning, Kinds, scope, steps and criteria of good survey. Case Study: Meaning, steps, precautions and recommendation.

UNIT: II Genetics Research: Meaning. Need, importance, steps in conducting Genetics research. Experimental Research: Meaning, uses, characteristics, field versus laboratory, General Principles, steps and experimental design (single, parallel, repeated and rotational)

UNIT: III Philosophical Research : Meaning ,Tools and steps for critical thinking. Research Proposal (Synopsis): Meaning and Significance .Steps of preparation of research proposal .Fundamentals of Computers (Input device, Output device, various uses in physical education) Location of research material with help of internet. UNIT: IV Research Report: Format: Preliminary Section Main Body (Introduction, statement, significance, hypothesis and technical terms) Review of related literature, Design of the study, Presentation of data, Interpretation of data, discussion, conclusion, summary, bibliography and appendices.

Reference

1. Best J.W.Research in Education, Prentice Hall Inc. : Delhi-1982 2. Clarke, H.David., Research Processes in Physical Education , Recreation & Health Prentice Hall Inc.1985. 3. Thomas Jerry R. and Nelson Jack K., Research Methods, Physical Activity. Human Kinetics Champaign, 1996. 4. Weimer, Jon, Research Techniques in Human Engineering. Prentice Hall: New Jersy.1994. 5. C.V.Good : Methods of Research , Appleton Century Crofts Inc., New York,1954. 6. W.R.Mouly : Educational Research Introduction, David Making CO. Inc. Yew York, 1975. 7. J.W.Best : Research in Education, Prentice Hall, 1980. 8. D.H. Clarke : Research Processes in Physical Education, Recreation and Health , Premice Hall, 1970.

42(140) M.P.Ed- IV Semester Paper – IV (Sports Medicine)

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Note: The question paper consists of five units i.e unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd., IVth. and Vth. The Unit Ist., IInd., IIIrd. and IVth consists of two questions from each unit(I to IV) carrying 15 marks each and unit Vth consists of ten short answer questions covering the whole syllabus carrying 2 marks each. The candidates are required to attempt one question from each unit(I to IV) and unit Vth is compulsory for all.

Unit-I. Socio Psychological Factors to improve performance in sports, Stress and sports competitions, Socio -Psychological Stress and human performance in sports, The Seley’s theory of stress and its implications, the Psychology and Physiology of Stress, Measurement of Stress, Over training stress syndrome. Psycho- physiological training for stress and psycho-somatic fitness.

Unit-II. Physiological responses to exercise in the heat, cold and altitude. Health risks during exercise in heat and cold, Athlete’s diet, Ergogenic aids and dopping.

Unit-III. Meaning and scope of body composition, methods of estimating body composition i.e skin fold and hydrometry method, body composition and exercise, Aerobic capacity and exercise.

Unit-IV. Energy, energy production during muscular activity, energy expenditure at rest and during exercise, Yoga therapy for psycho-physiological ailments, yoga and psycho-physiological training of games and sports.

References :

1. Armstrong and Tuckler : Injuries in Sports, London, Staples Press, 1964 2. Bolan, J.P. : Treatment and Prevention of Athletic Injuries. The Rasch, P.J Inter-state Printers and Publishers, 1967. 3. Morehouse, L.E and : Sports Medicine for Trainers, Philadephia, W.B. Saunder CO.,1963 Rasch, P.J. 4. Ryans Allan : Medical Care of the Athlete, McGraw Hill. 5. Morchouse & Miller : Physiology of Exercise 6. Falls : Exercise Physiology 7. Karpovitch : Physiology of Muscular activity 8. Pande, P.K. “ Know How Sports Medicine?” AP Publications, Jalandhar

42(141) M.P.Ed- IV Semester

Paper – V ( Scientific Principle of Sports Training ) Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

UNIT – I BIO-MOTOR ABILITIES AND THEIR DEVELOPMENT 1.1 Strength • Definition • Factors determining strength • Methods of strength: Trainig maximum strength, explosive strength and strength endurance. 1.2 Speed • Definition • Forms of speed • Factors determining speed • Load parameters to develop speed abilities • Methods to develop speed abilities

UNIT – II ENDURANCE, FLEXIBILITY AND COORDINATIVE ABILITIES 2.1 Endurance • Definition and significance of endurance • Factors Affecting endurance • Forms of endurance • Methods of develop endurance • Load parameters in relation to endurance Training 2.2 Flexibility • Definition and importance of flexibility • Factors determining flexibility • Forms of flexibility • Methods used to develop flexibility 2.3 Coordinative abilities • Definition • Classification of coordinative abilities • Methods used to develop coordinative abilities

UNIT – III TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL PREPARATION 3.1 Technique Training • Meaning of technique, skill and style • Aim of technique training in different sport

42(142) • Technique Training, its characteristics and implication in various phases, Methods employed for technique training, causes of technical faults and their correction. 3.2 Tactics • Meaning of tactics • Aim of tactics in sports • Training for tactics • Principles of tactical preparation

UNIT – IV COMPETITION TRAINING AND PERIODISATION 4.1 Periodisation • Meaning of Periodisation • Top form and periodisation • Aims and contents of various periods of periodisation • Types of Periodisation 4.2 Competition • Importance and frequency of competition • Preparation for competition (general guidelines, psychological preparation and Direct preparation)

REFERENCES 1. Hoeger (2005), “Principles and Labs in Fitness & Wellness”. 2. Jenson, C.R. Fisher, A.G. Scientific Basic of Athletic Conditioning, Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia, 1992. 3. Jones, J. Jones, Wells, L. Jannet, Peters, Rachael E., Johnson, Dewayne J., Effective Coaching (Principles & Practice). Allyn & Bacon, Massachusetts, USA, 1982. 4. Katch, F.L. & Mc. Ardle, W.O. (1989), “Nutrition, Weight Control and Exercises” 3rd ed. (Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger. 5. Lee, E. Brown & Vance A. Ferrigna (editors): Training for speed, Agility and Quickness, Human Kinetis, Champaign. Llc. USA, 2005. 6. Marney, B. Simon & Steren R. Levisohn. The Athlete within A Personal Guide To total Fitness, Little Brown Company, Boston, 1987. 7. Matveyew, L.P. Fundamentals of Sports Training (translation from Russian) Mir. Publishers, Moscow. 1991. 8. Novich, Max M. & Taylorm, Buddy Training Conditioning of Athletes, Lea & Febiger, Phildelphia, 1983. 9. Roy. J. Shephard (1994), “Aerobic Fitness and Health” (Human Kinetics Publishers). 10. Singh, H., Science of Sports Training, Delhi: D.V.S. Publishers, 1991. 11. Thani, Yograj, Sports Training, Delhi: Sports, 2003. 12. Uppal, A.K. and Gautam, Principles of Sports Training, Delhi: Friends, 2001.

42(143) 13. Vivian H. Heyward (1991), “Advanced Fitness Assessment and Exercise Prescription” 2nd ed. (Human Kinetics Publishers). 14. Willmore, J.H. Athletic Training and Physical Fitness. Allyand Bacon, Inc. Sydney, 1987. 15. Scott. K. Powers, Stephen L. Dodd. (1999) Total Fitness: Exercise, Nutrition and Wellness, Allyn & Bacon, United States of America.

42(144) M.P.Ed IVth. Semester Paper- VI Opt.(i) Supervision in Physical Education

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I Supervision in Physical Education

(i) Modern concept of supervision and how does it differs from inspection. (ii) Significance of Supervision to success the Physical Education and Sports programme in the modern trend. (iii) Qualities and qualification of good supervisor. (iv) Relationship of leader and supervisor in Physical Education and Sports programme.

Unit-II Methods in Supervision (i) General methods in supervision for improvement of instructions and professional growth – workshop, in – service training courses, clinics, advance study, professional literature, orientation and research. Evaluation : (i) Modern concept of evaluation (ii) Meaning and objectives of evaluation (iii) Factor effecting the evaluation Unit-III Planning and operating the supervision Programme. (i) The need for planning the supervisory programme (ii) Objectives of planning the supervisory programme (iii) Principles of planning the supervisory programme (iv) Relationship with the teaching staff (v) Group power and group work (vi) Teacher development

42(145) Unit-IV

Purpose and Principles of Organization (i) Rules and regulation of organization (ii) Procedure and attributes of an organization (iii) Destination and characteristics in organization (iv) Advantages and types of organization (v) Functions and developmental aspect of organization (vi) Public Relation and its importance in organization (vii) Community involvement and public relations.

REFERENCE 1. George. D. Butler : Introduction to community Recreation 2. J.B. Nash : Philosophy of Recreation and leisure 3. H.Dan Corbin : Recreation Leadership 4. John, L. Huthchinson : Principles of Recreation 5. Meyer, H.D and Nrightbill, C.K. : Community Recreation 6. Carl. E. Wilgoose : The curriculum in Physical Education Boston University, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. Jersey.

42(146) M.P.Ed- IV Semester Paper-VI. Opt.(ii) Sport Sociology

Time – 3 hours Total Marks : 100 Theory Marks: 80 Int. Assessment :20

Unit-I : Methods and Techniques of Sport Sociology. i) Sociometry. ii) Social Survey method iii) Interview method iv) The Meaning of Social Interaction - Competition, cooperation and Conflict Accommodation, Assimilation (Meaning, Types and role of social interaction) Unit- II : Sport and Leadership. i) Leadership of sport with other elements of culture, responsibilities of sport leader in competition, qualities of a sport leader. ii) Spectators, fans and violence influence in dynamics of sports iii) Sports problem at school and college (academic performance, use, mis-use and abuse of sports ) iv) Post retirement psychological problems of athletes Unit- III: Sport and Economic and Political Institution. i) Sport and business ii) Role of Physical Education in National integration iii) Politics in sport iv) Social Perception : (Perceiving self - Self concept and self esteem) Unit-IV: Sport and Commercialization, Public Relation process i) Impact of media on sport and sponsorship ii) Role of media in making and breaking images in sport iii) Impact of commercialization and privatization changes in sport iv) Planning and organization of public relation programme - Role and responsibility of physical Educator

REFERENCE 1. Bhusan, V. and Sachdeva, An introduction to Sociology, Delhi: Kitab, 2003. 2. Jain, Rachna, Sport Sociology, New Delhi : KSK, 2005. 3 Kanwal jeet, S., Sport Sociology, ND: Friends Pub. 2000. 4. Yadvinder Singh, Sociology in Sport, Sports Publication, 7/26 Ansari road, Darya Ganj New Delhi -110 002. 5. Sharma, R. N. Urban Sociology, ND: Surjeet Pub., 1993.

42(147) 6. Singh, Bhupinder, Sports Sociology, New Delhi : Friends, 2004. 7. IGNOU, The Study of Society – Understanding Sociology, Delhi-IGNOU, 2007. 8. Turner, B., Cambridge Dictionary of Sociology, U.K., Cambridge, U.N. Press.,2006. 9. Prof. A Yobu, Sociology of Sports, Friends Publications (India) 101,4787/23, Ansri road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi – 110 002

42(148) Paper-VI. Opt. – IIIrd. Dissertation = Evaluation Marks =80 Int. Assessment = 20 Total =100

Syllabus for Practical Papers (Semester-IV)

Paper-VII Class Room Theory Lesson (Practical) Marks 100

(i) Preparation of five Supervision lessons of class Room theory in the notebook. (ii) Assessment will be made by the external and internal examiners on the basis on performance, confidence level, body language in teaching and use of audio visual aids related to subject matter.

Paper-VIII Teaching and Coaching Athletic(Practical) Marks 100 1. General and specific warming up 2. Teaching of Athletic events (Track and field events) 3. Marking of Track and Field events 4. Knowledge and duties of various officials 5. Preparation of five Supervisory Athletic Lesson Plan in the Note-Book 6. Project work on Track and Field – History, various events records, conduct of Athletic meet (Project- Note-Book) Marks : 25

Paper-IX Teaching and Coaching of Games (Practical) Marks :100 General and specific warming up 2. Teaching of fundamental skills 3. Teaching of lead-up Games 4. Marking of concerned Playfields/ events 5. Preparation of five supervisory game lesson plan in the Note-Book 6. Knowledge and duties of the officials of the concern games. 7. Project work on concerned game – History, Various, techniques, records, and Conduct of the game (Project Note-Book) Marks : 25

42(149) M.A. APPLIED YOGA & HEALTH W.e.f from the session 2011-2012

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS ( Time : 3 hours for each Theory Paper)

SEMESTER I

Paper no. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. External Internal Marks Marks. Marks. Paper I Fundamentals of Yoga 100 80 20 Paper II Basic Psychology 100 80 20 Paper III Anatomy, Physiology & Yogic 100 80 20 Practices -I Paper IV Food Constituents & Meal 100 80 20 Planning Paper V Practical 100 80 20

SEMESTER II

Paper no. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. External Internal Marks Marks. Marks. Paper I Anatomy, Physiology & Yogic 100 80 20 Practices -II Paper II Introduction to Hatha Yoga 100 80 20 Paper III Yoga Therapy 100 80 20 Paper IV Psychology( Statistical & 100 80 20 Research Methodology) Paper V Practical 100 80 20

SEMESTER III

Paper no. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. External Internal Marks Marks. Marks. Paper I Introduction to Naturopathy 100 80 20 Paper II Patanjali Yoga Sutra 100 80 20 Paper III Abnormal Psychology 100 80 20 Paper IV General introduction & Uses 100 80 20 of Complementary Therapies Paper V Practical 100 80 20

42(150) SEMESTER IV

Paper no. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. External Internal Marks Marks. Marks. Paper I Yoga and Mental Health 100 80 20 Paper II Yogic Science, Human 100 80 20 Consciousness & Human Excellence Paper III Psychological Assessment & 100 80 20 Diagnosis Paper IV Dissertation 100 -- -- Paper V Practical 100 80 20

42(151) FUNDAMENTALS OF YOGA SEMESTER – I PAPER – I Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit-I • Meaning of Yoga & Definitions. • Traditional & Historical Development of Yoga. • Importance of Yoga in Modern Era. • Types of Yoga – Ashtang Yoga, Raj Yoga, Karma Yoga, Bhakti Yoga, Hatha Yoga, Kriya Yoga, Gyan Yoga and Mantra Yoga. Unit – II • Study of yoga in following text- Vedas, Upanishad, Gita, Buddhism, Jainism, Patanjali yog Sutra and Six systems of Indian Philosophy,. Unit – III • Life sketches of the following yogis with important incidents of their lives and contribution in the Development of Yoga : - Maharishi Patanjali, Guru Gorakhnath, Swami Shivanand, Swami Vivekanand, Shri Aribindo. Unit – IV • Life sketches of the following Yoginis : - Maa Sharda, Shri Maa, Meera Bai, Yogini Laleshwari, Maa Anandmai. Unit – V Introduction of Yoga Institutes :- • Bihar Yoga Bharti Yoga Institute, Munger, Bihar. • Kaivayala Dham – Lonavala • Gurukul Kangri University, Haridwar. • Swami Vivekanand Institute of Yoga for Research, Banglour • Jain Vishwabharti Yoga Sansthana, Ladnun, Rajasthan • Dev Sanskriti Vishwavidhyala, Haridwar. Reference Books • Science of Yoga – Lokeh foKkukuan ljLorh

• Indian Philosophy - Mk0 bZ'oj Hkkj}kt

• ;ksx egkfoKku & Mk0 dkek[;k dqekj

• Hkkjr dh egku ;ksx foHkwfr;k &

• Hkkjr dh egku ukfj;ka &

42(152) SEMESTER – I PAPER – II BASIC PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Meaning & definition of Psychology: The scientific methods – observational (Correlation) & Experimental method. Unit – II Biological Bases of Behaviour : • Neuron – types structure & functions, neurotransmitters. • The nervous system, its major divisions (Endocrine System) (CNS & PNS). • (Brain the brain stem. Hypothalamus, Thalamus, Limbic System Cerebrum). Unit – III Learning – Meaning & Nature of harming, classical conditioning & Operant conditioning: its meaning, types & applications (Cognitive factors of learning). Memory & Forgetting : Memory – meaning of memory, types of memory, process of memory and stages of memory. Forgetting causes of forgetting & measures of improving memory. Unit-IV Motivation & Emotion : Meaning and nature of motivation, types of motivations, theories of motivation, etrine, incentive, need-hierarchy theory. Meaning, nature & types of emotion, the external expression of emotion, non-verbal cues (Biological basis of emotion & emotional intelligence). Unit – V Intelligence : Meaning & Nature of intelligence, intelligence quotient, theory of intelligence, Gardner’s theory, Stenberg’s theory & cattle’s theory, measuring intelligence, binet test Bhatia battery, Wechsler scales & verbal test of intelligence. Reference 1. Psychology (5th edi) – Carole Wadi & Carol Tavris (1998) Books (U.S.) 2. Psychology (5th ed.) – Robbert A. Baron (2001) 3. Essential of Psychology (6th ed.) by – Spenur A Rathur (2001) 4. Introduction to Psychology (6th ed.) by – Ernest r. Hilgard.

42(153) ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND YOGIC PRACTICES - I SEMESTER – I PAPER – III Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Introduction to Human Body, and its System Cell: Structure of cell, micro- molecules of cells, Macromolecules of cell, functions of cell, tissue. Different types of tissue. Unit-II Skeletal System – Composition (No. of bones & types), joints – types & structure of the all joints, structure of vertebral column, cervical/lumber vertebrae. Effect of yogic practices on joints. Unit – III Muscular System: Types and structure of muscle, properties of muscles, and elementary knowledge of muscle contraction, muscle tone, muscular strength, and muscle fatigue function of muscular tissue in the body. Unit – IV Digestive System: Structure of digestive tract with special emphasis of functions of each digestive organ for digestion. Physiology of digestion and effect of yogic practices on the digestive system. Unit – V Respiratory System: Structure of respiratory tract with emphasis on their role in respiration. Physiology of external and internal respiration. Effect of Yogic practices on respiratory system. Elementary knowledge of various respiratory volumes & capacities, respiratory rate and effects of yogic practices on them. Reference Books • lqJqr ('kjhj foKku) & xksfoUn HkkLodj pk.ksdj

• 'kjhj jpuk foKku & MkW- eqdqUn Lo:Ik oekZ

• 'kjhj fØ;k foKku & MkW0 fiz;or oekZ

• 'kjhj jpuk ,oa fØ;k foKku & MkW0 ,l0vkj0 oekZ

• Human Physiology – Chatterjee • Anatomy & Physiology for Nurses – T.W.A. Glenister and J.R.W. Rose. • A Text Book of Medical Physiology - Gautam

42(154) FOOD CONSTITUENTS AND MEAL PLANNING SEMESTER - I PAPER – IV Time: 3 Hours MM: 100 Ext.: 80 Int.: 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Definition of food, its classification and its functions • Concept of Balanced Diet • Concept of Mithahar, Alphahar and Yogic diet & its types. • Concept of Weight Management. Unit-II Study of: Protein, Carbohydrate, fat, fiber & water, their daily allowance & effect of their deficiency and excess. • Concept of vegetarian and non vegetarian • Diet.

Unit – III Study of vitamins (A, B, C, D, E, K, B1, B2, B3, B12). • Study of Minerals (Iron, Iodine, Calcium, Phosphorus) their daily allowance & effect of their deficiency and excess. Unit – IV Concept and Principles of Meal Planning and Factors affecting it. Meal Planning for • 0 – 3 year children • School going kids • Adolescents and • Adults Unit – V Meal Planning During Pregnancy, Lactating Mother, After menopause, Working women, Old age persons. Reference Books : 1. A hand book of food & nutrition – F.P. Antia 2. Foods & nutrition – Swaminathan 3. Normal & therapeutic nutrition – Robinson lawler 4. Fundamentals of food & nutrition – S.R. Mandambi and M.V. Rajagopal 5. Principles of Nutrition – E.D. Wilson, K.H. Fisher.

42(155) SEMESTER – I PAPER – V PRACTICAL Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Yoga Practical 40 marks Unit – I Prayer, Gayatri Mantra, Mahamrintumjaya mantra Unit – II Shatkarmas : Jala Neti, Rubber Neti, Kunjal Unit – III Asan : Pawan Muktasan Part – 1, 2, 3, Surya Namaskar, Sankat Asan, Triyak Tadasan, Makrasan, Matsyasan, Ardhhalasan, Padmasana, Janu Shirasana, Gomukhasana Vakrasana, Tadasan, Naukasana, Pawan Muktasana, Mandukasana, Shawasan. Unit-IV Pranayama : Breathing practice-abdominal, chest and yogic, Poorak, Kumbhak, Rechak anulome – vilome. Unit – V Mudra Bandh : Moolbandh, Jalandhar bandh, Gyan Mudra, Pran Mudra. Meditation : Om ka dhyan

Psychology 20 marks Practical : 1. Sentence completion test 2. Problem solving 3. Washler Intelligence test 4. EPQ-r/16PF

Anatomy – 20 marks Physiology 1. Body Temperature (Practical): 2. Pulse rate 3. Recording of systematic Arterial Bood Pressure. 4. Models or specimen spotting– Brain, Bones, Lungs, Heart, Human Skeleton. 5. Chart identification of All Bodily Systems. * Internal marks will depend upon the attendance, project report, chart/model, presentation & file.

42(156) ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY & YOGIC PRACTICES – II SEMESTER – II PAPER – I Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Cardio-Vascular System: Its components, structure & functioning of Heart, Blood, its composition & function, chief characteristics of Artery & Veins. Effect of yogic practices on cardio vascular system. Unit-II Lymphatic System: Introduction to Lymphatic System, Immune System & Immunity, Resistance Power, Effect of yogic practices on Lymphatic System. Unit-III Nervous System: Introduction to Nervous System, its types transmission of Nerve impulse, Reflex action, Explain central nervous system, Peripheral nervous system & Autonomic nervous system. Effect of yogic practices • On nervous system • Structure & functions of nose ears eyes. Effect of yogic practices on them. Unit-IV Excretory System: Organs of excretory system, their structure, structure of a nephron, physiology of the formation of urine. Effects of yogic practices on excretory system. Reproductive System: Structure, physiology of Male & Female reproduction system, describe functions, effect of yogic practices on reproductive system. Unit-V Endocrinal System: Meaning of Endocrine and exocrine glands & their differentiation, name and location of endocrine glands, meaning of hormone , enzyme & differentiations, hormones of pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid, pancreas, adrenal gland and their functions in the body. Effect of yogic practices on endocrinal glands. Reference 1. Sarir Kriya Vigyan – Priyabrata Sharma books 2. Sarir Rachana Vigyan – Mukund Swarup Verma 3. Ayurvedic Kriya Sarir – Ranjeet Sahaya Desai 4. Yoga avam swasthya – Raaj Publication 5. Manav Sarir Deepika – Dr. Mukund Swarup Verma 6. Health for all through yoga – Dr. Ganesh Shanker Ghi 7. Basic Physiology – E.D. Amour Fred 8. Hman Physiology – Chakravarti, Ghosh and Sahana

42(157) SEMESTER – II PAPER – II INTRODUCTION OF HATH YOGA Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Concept & Principles : • Hatha Yoga – Meaning & Definition • Brief introduction of Hatha Yogic granthas • Hatha Yoga & Human Health Unit – II Principles : • Aims of Hatha yoga • Components of Hatha Yoga • Principles of practicing Hatha yoga • Time, season, diet & place for practicing Hatha Yoga • Sign & symptom of success in Hatha Yoga Unit – III Process, Practice & Benefits (According to Gherand Sanhita & Hath Yog Pardipika): • Shatkarmas – Neti, Dhauti, Vasti, Nauli, Kapal bhati, Trataka • Asanas – Gherand Samhita • Pranayama – Hatha Yog Pradipika Unit-IV Process, Practice & Benefits (According to Gherand Sanhita & Hath Yog Pardipika) : Mudra / Bandha – Gherand Samhita Dharna & Dhyan Kundalini, Chakras, Madanusandhan and awaken of kundalini. Unit – V Physiological, Psychological & Spiritual aspects of Hatha Yoga : • Effect of Hatha Yogic Practices on Human Physiology • Effect of Hatha Yogic Practices on Human Psychology. • Spiritual development through Hatha Yoga Practices. Reference 1. Sadhana Paddhation ka gyan or vigyan, pl. Shri Ram Sharma. Books 2. Hatha yoga pradipika – Kaivalyadham lonawala 3. Hatha Yoga Pradipika – Swatmaran Krut Swami Digamberji 4. Gorak Samhita – Gorakhnath Mandir, Gorakhpur. 5. gherand Samhita – Kaivalyadham Lonawala 6. Textbook of yoga – Yogeshwar 7. Mysterious Kundolini – Dr. Vasant Rule 8. Asana, Pranayama, Mudra, Bandha – Swami Satyanand Saraswati.

42(158) YOGA THERAPY SEMESTER – II PAPER – III Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I • Meaning and Definition of Health, Characteristics of Healthy person, concept of Swasthvratha, Dincharya (Elements of Daily Routine). • Exercise : Meaning & types of exercise, Different between yogic and non yogic system of exercise, 1. Concept of Sandhyoupasana 2. Concept and benefits of sleep and celibacy, Ritucharya – Ritu devisions, Accumulation of diseases (dosh) a/c to seasons, their effects and remedies. Unit-II Meaning and concept of yoga therapy, principles of yogic therapy, scope of yogic therapy, limitation of yogic therapy. Unit – III Causes, signs, symptoms and yogic treatment including dietary measures – • Obesity, constipation, indigestion, peptic ulcer • Backache, sciatica, cervical spondylytis, weak eyesight. Unit – IV Causes, signs, symptoms and yogic treatment including Dietary measures of the following :- • common cold, gastric acidity, bronchial asthma, arthritis • Insomnia, stress & depression, thyroid, sinusitis Unit – V Causes, sign, symptoms and yogic treatment including dietary measures of the following : • Women problems – Menstrual problem, Leucorrhoea ; Anemia, Headache & Migraine • Heart diseases, High & Low Blood Pressure, Diabetes. Reference Books • Hatha yoga for human health – Dr. Nitin Korpal and Dr. Ganesh Shankar. • Classical and Modern approaches to yoga – Dr. Ganesh Shankar. • Anatomy & Physiology of Yogic Practices – B.K. S. Iyonger. • Rog or yog – Swami Shivanand • lk/uk ifr;ksa dk Kku&foKku & ia- Jhjke 'kekZ vkpk;Z • vklu izk.kk;ke ls vkf/&O;kf/ fuokj.k & ia- Jhjke 'kekZ vkpk;Z

42(159) SEMESTER - II PAPER – IV PSYCHOLOGY (STATISTICS & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY) Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Introduction of statistics & its application. Measures in general, graphical representation of research data, measures of central tendency mean, median, mode. Unit – II Measures of variability – Range, Quartile deviation (Q) and standard deviation (SD). The normal distribution – Meaning & Importance of the Normal distribution, Application of Normal Probability curve. Unit – III Correlation : The coefficient of correlation. Correlation and correlation by product moment method, chi-square test & t-test, ANOVA, critical ratio. Unit-IV Introduction Problem, Hypothesis & Sampling. Meaning, nature & types of research, need & importance of research in yoga research problem – meaning & characteristics. Meaning nature & type of Hypothesis, meaning nature & type of sampling. Unit – V Types of Research Methods – observational, experimental, co- relation variables, meaning & nature of variables & its types, research design – purpose & types of research design. Research report writing. Reference 1-vuqla/ku fof/;ka & ,-ds- dfiy Books 2-euksfoKku] lekt'kkL=k rFkk f'k{kk esa 'kks/fof/;ka & Mk- v:.k dqekj flag 3-'kks/ iz.kkyh & eks- lqyseku 4- Foundation of Behavioural Research – Kerlinger 5- Research Method in Behavioural Sciences – Festinger & Katz 6- Research Method – S.M. Mohsim 7- Statistics and Research Methodology - Garatte SEMESTER – II PAPER – V

42(160) PRACTICAL Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Yoga Practical 40 marks Unit – I Saraswati Mantra, Rudropasana, Swastic Mantra, Prayer and Soham sadhana. Unit – II Shatkarma : Sutra Neti, Vaman, Nauli, Kapal Bhati, (Vata Karma) Agnisar. Unit – III Asana : Surya Namaskar, Pragya Yoga, Vrikshasana, Padhastasan, side band chakrasana, ardha chandrasan, Katichakras, Trikanasana, Padhastasan, Vajrasana, Supt Vajrasan, Shashankasan, Akarana Dhanurasan, Padmasan, Swastikasan, Sidhasana, Sukhasan, Chakrasan, Ardhdhanrasan, Sarpasan, Bhujangasan. Unit-IV Pranayama : Nadi Shodha, Ujjaji, Bhramari, Surya Bhedan. Unit – V Mudra Bandha : Nabho mudra, Vipreet Karani mudra, shambhavi mudra, uddiyan bandh, Hastamudra, Dhyan Mudra, Vayu Mudra, Chin mudra. Meditation – rising sun Psychology 20 marks (Practical): 1. Adjustment Inventory 2. Stress Inventory 3. P.G.I. Health Questionnaire 4. Children’s problems check list Anatomy – Physiology 20 marks (Practical) 1. Blood estimation – D.L.C., T.L.C., H.B. 2. Urine estimation – Sugar, Uric Acid, Ketone body, Protein.

* Internal marks will depend upon the attendance, project report, chart/model, presentation & file.

42(161) SEMESTER – III PAPER – I INTRODUCTION TO NATUROPATHY Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Naturopathy : Meaning, concept , philosophy & brief history of naturopathy, basic principles of nature cure, disease – causes, types & classification, Principles of poisoning by waste products, pranic force – meaning & concept, methods for strengthening the pranic force. Diagnosis of diseases by shapes of body / bodily organs. Unit – II Hydro Therapy : Water, its types importance of water, methods of using water as therapy, effects of different water temperature on the body, Bath – Types and benefits, Bandages of different bodily organs in water therapy & their benefits, Enema & its uses. Concept of Ushapaan, its importance and benefits, physiological effect of hydro therapy on human body. Unit – III Mud Therapy : Importance of soil, its types, characteristics & uses in therapy, Mud bath, Bandages of mud, its uses and application. Sun Therapy : Importance of sun rays, action & reaction of sun rays on human body, sun bath & its uses in different diseases. Uses of different colour of sun rays. Air Therapy : Importance of air, Air bath its uses. Physiological effect of sun, mud & air therapy on human body. Unit-IV Fasting: Concept meaning of fasting, its types, and principals of fasting, their importance for maintaining health management of diseases, precautions before, during & after fasting, action & reactions of fasting on human body. Physiological effect of fast on human body. Unit – V Massage: Concept of massage its meaning & Definition its history & importance, types of massage, effect of massage on different bodily organ, role of massage in management of diseases, physiological effect of massage on human body. Reference 1-izkd`frd vk;qZfoKku & Mk0 jkds'k ftUny Books 2- History & Philosophy of Naturopathy – Dr. S.J. Singh 3- philosophy of Nature cure – Dr. Henry Lindlhai 4- The Practice of Nature Cure – Dr. Henery 5- Art of Massage – J.H. Kellong 6- Nature Cure – H.K. Bakhru

SEMESTER – III 42(162) PAPER – II PATANJALI YOGA SUTRA Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Introduction to Patanjali Yoga Sutra & its historical background, definition of yoga, concept of chitta, chitta bhumies, modifications of chitta, chitta vritties, methods to control chitta vritis, methods of chitta prasadan. Unit – II Kriya yoga, Panchklesha, yogantaraya & their associates, means to eradicate antrayas klesha, karamsiddhanta, karamshya, pdaman and its kind, dukh ka swaroop,

chaturvyauvad (prqO;qZgokn) Unit – III Ashtang Yoga : its eight limbs, yama – niyam, mahavrata swroop, phal (fruits) of eight limbs, vitark vivechan (forZd foospu), Chitta ka parinam (ifj.kke), Sanyam Unit-IV Samadhi – Sampragyat, Asampragyat, Ritambhara pragya

(rEHkjk izKk), Sapta da pragya (lIr/k izKk), Dharam medha Samadhi. Unit – V Purush, Prakriti, Ishwar, Ishwar Pranidhan, Adbyas,

Varigya, Siddhi’s five types (Hksn), Karma types

(Hksn), karam ka swaroop, swaroop pratishtan, vibhuti & its types, kaivalya, vivek khyati. Reference Books 1. Yog darshan – Pt. Shriram Sharma Acharya 2. Patanjal Yog Pardupika – Swami Omananda Tirth 3. Yog Sutra Raj Martind – Bhojraj 4. Yog Darshan – Rajveer Shashtri 5. Four Step of Freedom – Swami Sivananda Saraswati

42(163) SEMESTER – III PAPER – II ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit – I Cognition : Meaning of cognition, meaning & nature of thinking, basic element of thought, concept, proposition, images & decision making. Perception : Meaning & nature, sensory thresholds, perceptual processes, theories of perception & gestalt theory, perceptual organization. Unit – II Personality : Meaning & definition, theories of personality, Freud’s psycho analytical theory, Jung’s Analytical theory, Rogers’s self theory. Maslow’s self Actualizing theory. G Allport – Trait theory of Personality & Hans Eysenk’s Biological trait theory. Measuring personality – questionnaires, inventions & projective techniques. Unit – III Abnormal Psychology : Abnormal Behaviour : Brief Historical views of Abnormal behaviour. Meaning & Definition of Abnormal Psychology. Nature and criteria of Abnormal Behavior & characteristics of Abnormal Behavior Contemporary Issue in Abnormal psychology. Unit-IV General Causal Factors in Abnormal Behaviour : The biological causal factors, the psycho social causal factors & the socio cultural causal factors. Unit – V Nature & causes of Abnormal behaviour. The current classification – The DSM – IVTR and ICD.10 & its Brief Introduction. Reference 1. Introduction to Psychology by – Clifford T. Morgam. Books 2. theories of Personality (7th ed.) by Duane P. Sehultz. 3. Psychological Testing (7th ed.) by Anne Anastasi, Susana Urbina (2005) 4. Advanced General Psychology – Arun Kumar Singh 5. Theories of Personality (4th ed.) – Cavin S. Hall

GENERAL INTRODUCTION & USE OF COMPLEMENTARY THERAPIES 42(164) SEMESTER – III PAPER – IV Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit – I Panchkarma : Introduction of Panch Karma, History of Panchkarma, Components of Panchkarma, Steps of Panchkarma, Panchkarma for common problems – common cold, Headache, Asthma, Thyroids, Body Pain, Joint Pain, Arthritis, Diabetes, Obesity, High B.P. & Low B.P., Digestive problems. Stress & Depression. Unit – II Acupressure: Introduction & History of Acupressure, Components of Acupressure, General Introduction of Acupressure Instruments. Acupressure for Common Problems: Knee joint pain, cervical spondilytes, lumber pain, shoulder pain, backache, constipation, and headache. Unit – III Yogyopathy: Introduction & History of Yogyopathy Components of Yogyopathy. Yogyopathy for Respiratory problems dust allergy, smoke allergy, skin problem, stress, depression, frustration. Unit-IV Introduction of Reiki, Magnetic therapy, aroma, pranic healing, colour therapy, Acupuncture & Basics of Ayurveda their uses in physical mental & emotional problems. Unit – V General Introduction of Spiritual therapy, need of spiritual therapy in this modern era. Spiritual therapy for emotional problems: emotional immaturity. Emotional instability, depression, negative thinking. Reference 1- lw;Z fdj.kfpfdRlk & Mk0 eksgu yky dkBkSfr;k Book 2- vkè;kfRed fpfdRlk ,d lexz mipkj i¼fr & Mk- iz.ko i.M;k 3- jksx vkSj ;ksx & Lokeh f'kokuUn 4- ,D;wizS'kj & Mk0 vrj flag 5- ;K dk Kku foKku & ia0 Jh jke 'kekZ vkpk;Z 6- iapdekZ foKku & oS| th0ds0 nos 7- Mk0 lw;Z & ;ksxkpk;Z Mk0 vksadkjukFk 8- vk;qosZnh; iapdeZ foKku&oS| gfjnkl 9- lw;Zfdj.k fpfdRlk & Mk0 }kjdkukFk ukjax

42(165) 10- lw;Z jf'e;ksa }kjk fpfdRlk & Jhefr jktdqekjh xqIrk 11- Pranic Healing – Choa Cock Sui

SEMESTER – III PAPER –V PRACTICAL Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Yoga Practical : 40 marks

Unit – I Mantra – Rudrashtak, Yanmadalam Stuti (16 lines) Rudra Gayatri Mantra, Om hi jewan hamara & prayer Unit – II Shatkarma : Double nostril Rubber Neti, Danda Dhauti, Ardha Vastra Dhauti, Vyutkarma kapal bhati, nauli. Unit – III Asanas : Surya Namaskar, Pragya Yoga, Chandra Namaskar, Chakrasan, Anjani Asan, Shirshapad Angushthasana, Janusirasan, Akarndhanurasana, Halasan, Karnpeedasana, Vatayan Asan, Tulankulasan, Utthit Padmasan, Sarvagusana, Bakasana, Ekpad skandhasana, Raja Kapotasana, Bhujangasana, Bhoonam Asan, Poornushrasan, Dhanurasana. Unit – IV Pranayama : Bhastrika, Bharamari, Abhyantravriti, Sheetali. Mudra/bandha – Tribandha, Nasikagra Mudra, San mukh mudra, Tadagi mudra, Khechhari mudra, Hasta Mudra: Kamjayi, Panchtatva Mudra. Unit – V Meditation : Soham Dhyan. Yog nidra Psychology 20 Marks Practical : • Eight state scale • Sinha’s Comprehensive Anxiety Test • The interiority & Insecurity Questionnaire • Optimistic Pessimistic Attitude Scale. Naturopathy 20 Marks Practical : Sprouts making, simple bath, sauna bath, sun bath, hydrotherapy – steam bath, Anema, jaccuzi, wet bendage (hot + cold), spinal bath, hip bath, arm & foot bath, full body sheet.

* Internal marks will depend upon the attendance, project report, chart/model, presentation & file. 42(166) 42(167) YOGA & MENTAL HEALTH SEMESTER – IV PAPER – I Time:3 Hours ` MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit – I Meaning of Mental Health, components of mental health, mental health crises, and role of yoga in mental health. Importance of mental health. Unit – II Mind & Consciousness: Meaning & Definition of mind, Stage of mind – conscious, subconscious, unconscious, super conscious, mind-body relation. Unit – III Yogic Approach to mental health – Maharishi Patanjali Approach of mental health-Chitt Viritti, Panch Klesh, Karmphal, Vibhuti, Ashtang Yoga, Chita Parsadan. Unit-IV Hatha yogic approach to mental health – 1. Cleansing Practices & Mental Health. 2. Asana & Mental Health 3. Pranyama & Mental Health 4. Mudra - Bandh & Mental Health 5. Dharna – Dhyan & Mental Health Unit – V Shrimad Bhagwat Geeta approach of mental health-karam yoga, bhakti yoga, gyan yoga & other techniques in Geeta. Psychologic approach to mental health – behavioural approach & cognitive approach. Reference • ;ksx ,oa ekufld LokLF; & Mk0 lqjs'k c.kZoky Book • Jhen~ Hkxor xhrk & xhrk izSl] xksj[kiqj A • Yog darshan – Pt. Shriram Sharma Acharya • Patanjal Yog Pardupika – Swami Omananda Tirth • Yog Sutra Raj Martind – Bhojraj • Yog Darshan – Rajveer Shashtri • Four Step of Freedom – Swami Sivananda Saraswati • Abnormal Psychology – Dr. A.K.Singh SEMESTER – IV

42(168) PAPER – II YOGIC SCIENCE HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS & HUMAN EXCELLENCE Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit – I Meaning and definition of Human Consciousness, Human Consciousness in Veda, Upnishad & 6 System of Indian Philosophy. The various aspects of Human Consciousness – Janma-Jeevan, Bhagya – Purushartha, Karmaphal Vidhan, Sanskar – Punar Janma. Unit – II Meaning of Human Excellence, Aspects of Human Excellence – Physical excellence mental excellence, social excellence & spiritual excellence. Unit – III Physical & mental excellence in yoga – meaning & nature of physical excellence, Patanjali’s & Hatha yogic techniques of physical excellence, meaning & nature of mental excellence & techniques for mental excellence. Unit-IV Social excellence in yoga – Meaning & nature of social excellence, social excellence techniques in yoga sutras, adjustment solutions; social contribution of a yoga. Unit – V Spiritual excellence in yoga – Meaning & nature of spiritual excellence significance of spiritual excellence. Techniques of spiritual excellence, stages of spiritual excellence. Reference Books 1. Yog darshan – Pt. Sriram Sharma Achariya. 2. Patanjal Yog pardeep – Swami Omananda Tirth 3. Yog Manovigyan – Dr. Santi Prakash Atreya 4. Dhyan Yog Parkash – Lax mananda 5. Yoga as Depth – Psychology & C.T. kenghe Pra. Psychology 6. Lights on Yog Sutra – B.K.S. Iyenger 7. Sankara on Yog Sutras – Traver Leggests 8. Patanjal Yoga Sutras – Woods 9. Patanjal Yog Sutras – Karambelkar SEMESTER – IV PAPER – III PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT AND DIAGNOSIS

42(169) Time: 3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Note: The question paper will consist of five Units,I,II,III,IV and V. Each units will have two questions. Only five questions will be attempted selecting at least one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks. Unit – I Testing Assessment & Diagnosis: Meaning of testing, assessment & diagnosis, assessment and diagnosis tools – ICD – 10, the test, interview, case study & behaviour observation. Assumption in psychological testing & assessment. Unit – II Clinical Assessment : Meaning of clinical assessment, types of assessment, assessment technique, process of assessment, clinical observation of behaviour clinical relationship. Unit – III Characteristics of assessment tools – reliability & validity. Interview in clinical practice, types of interview, process of interview, verbal & non-verbal communication in interview. Unit-IV Psychiatry History and Examination : Identification data, informants, presenting (chief), complaints, history of present illness, part psychiatric and medical history, treatment history, family history, personal history. Unit – V Physical examination, investigation, formulation the psychological problems & their yogic treatment, stress, depression, phobia, OCD, frustration. Meaning definition types & process of counseling. Personal counseling, educational counseling, career counseling, marriage & family counseling. Reference 1. Psychology (5th edi) – Carole Wadi & Carol Tavris (1998) (U.S.) Books 2. Psychology (5th ed.) – Robbert A. Baron (2001) 3. Essential of Psychology (6th ed.) by – Spenur A Rathur (2001) 4. Introduction to Psychology (6th ed.) by – Ernest r. Hilgard. 5. Introduction to Psychology by – Clifford T. Morgam. 6. theories of Personality (7th ed.) by Duane P. Sehultz. 7. Psychological Testing (7th ed.) by Anne Anastasi, Susana Urbina (2005) 8. Advanced General Psychology – Arun Kumar Singh 9. Theories of Personality (4th ed.) – Cavin S. Hall

42(170) SEMESTER – IV PAPER – IV DISSERTATION MM : 100

Dissertation is compulsory to all students. Students will select the research topic themselves and prepare the research plan. In doing so the consent of the guide is necessary. After completing the dissertation work, its two typed copies will be submitted till 31 st March in the department only. The empirical work is compulsory for all students. The evaluation of the dissertation will be done by external examiner in co-ordination with the supervisor & the department head. The viva –voice exam will also be conducted under it. The evaluation pattern is as below: 1. Dissertation work – 60 marks 2. Viva- Voice – 40 marks

42(171) SEMESTER – IV PAPER – V PRACTICAL Time:3 Hours MM : 100 Ext. : 80 Int. : 20 Yoga Practical : 40 marks Unit – I Mantra : Varun Gayatri, Luxmi Gayatri, Shubkamna, 32 lines of yanmandalam stuti, durga stuti. Unit – II Shatkarma: Double nostril sutra neti, vastra dhauti, sheet karma, kapal bhati, nauli, complete (C.S.P.), Tratak. Unit – III Yogasana : Surya Namaskar, Pragya Yoga, Chander Namaskar, Standing Chakarasana, Ekpad chakrasana, sarvangasana, sheershasana, baddha – padmasana, padmbakasana, padam sheershasana, poorn shalabhasan, garbhasan, kundaliasan, natrajasan, tandavasana, vipreet karni asana, 32 asan from gherund samhita & 15 asanas from Hathapardupika. Unit – IV Pranayama : Pranakarshan pranayama, antah kumbhak, banya kumbhak, ashtakumbhak (Acc. to H.A.) mudra/bandh, tribandha, ashwani mudra, vjroli mudra, sahjoli, akashi mudra, kaki mudra. Unit – V Dharna : Pardhivi dharna, chidakash dharna. Dhyan : Yog nidra, panch kosha jagran dhyan, dhyan of chakras, dhyan of kundalini awaken, soham meditation. Psychology : 20 marks 1. Self concept 2. Emotional maturity 3. Sentence completion 4. Emotional Stability 5. Self Confidence 6. Depression 7. Eysinck’s Maudsly Personality Inventory

Naturopathy : 20 marks Mud Therapy – Mud bath, mudpack, poultice, bandage Massage Therapy – Massage steps of head, spine, hand, legs and whole body with acupressure points. Disease diagnosis through bodily symptoms.

* Internal marks will depend upon the attendance, project report, chart/model, presentation & file.

42(172) Scheme of Examination for M.A Yoga and Health Therapy Ist to IVth. Semester from the session 2011-12 for M.D.S.D.Girls College, Ambala City.

M.A. YOGA & HEALTH THERAPY ( I st. Semester) Theory ; 3 hours Maximum Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

Max. Marks Int. Assessment Total Paper-Ist. Yoga Philosophy (Yog Darshan) 80 20 100 Paper-IInd. Nature Cure Phiolosphy (prakritik 80 20 100 Chikitsa Darshan) Paper-IIIrd. Basic Physiotherapy 80 20 100 Paper-IVth. Basic Anatomy 80 20 100 Paper-Vth. Basic Physiology 80 20 100 ______Total-500

M.A. YOGA & HEALTH THERAPY ( IInd. Semester) 42(173) Theory ; 3 hours Maximum Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

M. Marks Int. A. Ext. Practical Total Paper-Ist. Yoga Philosophy (Yog Darshan) 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM =50 Marks 1. Project work according to theory 05 2. Lesson Plan according to theory 10 3. Practice of Shatkarma, Suryanamaskar and Yogic 10 Sukshma and Sthula Vyayam Dheerendera Bramhchari and Pawan-Muktasana yogic series according to Munger Publication 4. Practice of Pranayam 05 5. Viva 20 Paper-IInd. Nature Cure Philosophy (prakritik 80 20 50 150 Chikitsa Darshan) Ext. MM =50 Marks

1. 1st semester practical work show 10 2. Identification of Naturopathy 10 apparatus and uses 3. Lesson plan 10 4. Viva 20 Paper-IIIrd. Basic Physiotherapy 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM =50 Marks 1. 1st semester practical work show 10 2. Practical work from the above 10 mentioned chapters 3. Lesson plan 10 4. Viva 20 Paper-IVth. Basic Anatomy 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM =50 Marks 1. As per theory 10 2. Identification of organs 20 3. Viva 20 Paper-Vth. Basic Physiology 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM. – 50 Marks 1. As per theory 10 2. Uses of stethoscope, B.P. apparatus, Thermometer and weighing chart 20 3. Viva as per theory 20

Total 750 M.A. YOGA & HEALTH THERAPY ( III rd. Semester)

42(174) Theory ; 3 hours Maximum Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

Max. Marks Int. Assessment Total Paper-Ist. Yoga & Therapeutic Techniques 80 20 100 (Kriyatmak Yog) Paper-IInd. Naturopathy (Prakritik Chikistsa) 80 20 100 Paper-IIIrd. Physiotherapy Management 80 20 100 Paper-IVth. Patient Rehabilitation 80 20 100 Paper-Vth. Hospital Management 80 20 100 Total- 500

42(175) M.A. YOGA & HEALTH THERAPY ( IVth. Semester) Theory ; 3 hours Maximum Marks: 80 Int. Assessment : 20

Max. Marks Int. Assessment Ext. Practical Total Paper-Ist.Kriyatmak Yog (Yoga & 80 20 50 150 Therapeutic Techniques Ext. MM. - 50 1. As per I & II Semester. 05 2. Lesson plan 05 3. Yoga class taking & Demonstration 20 as per theory. 4. Viva as per theory 20

Paper-IInd. Naturopathy (Prakritik Chikistsa) 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM. - 50

1.Project work according to theory. 10 1. Lesson plan according to theory. 10 2. Demonstration of therapeutic 10 methods as per theory. 3. Viva as per theory 20

Paper-IIIrd. Physiotherapy Management 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM. - 50 1. Project work according to theory. 10 2. Lesson plan according to theory. 10 3. Demonstration of therapeutic methods 10 as per theory. 4. Viva as per theory 20

Paper-IVth. Patient Rehabilitation 80 20 50 150 EXT.MM-50

Paper-Vth. Hospital Management 80 20 50 150 Ext. MM. - 50 1. Project work according to theory. 10 2. Lesson plan according to theory - 10 3. Demonstration of therapeutic 10 methods as per theory. 4. Viva as per theory 20 Total 750 SYLLABUS FOR

42(176) M.A- YOGA AND HEALTH THERAPY (SEMSTER-I) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-I YOGA PHILOSOPHY (YOG-DARSHAN) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT-I CONTENTS: Life history and work on Yogic literature of Swami Swatmaram, Swami Gherand, Swami Deerendra Bramhachari and Guru Gorakshnath. UNIT-II CONTENTS: What is Raj, Hatha, Ghatastha, Shadang, Jap, Kundalni, Bhakti and Shankhya yog with the description of related literature. UNIT-III CONTENTS: Life history and work on Yogic literature of Marishi Patanjali, Swami Charandas, Matsyendranath, Rishi Kashyap and V.K.S. Ayanger. UNIT-IV CONTENTS: What is Yog-Darshan and Shad-Darshan. Give in detailed external universe discipline i.e. Yam and Niyam and its comparative study according to following yogic text i.e. Patanjali Yog Darshan, Hath-Yog, Gheranda-yog, Swami Charandas and yog-Vashishtha. UNIT-V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 02 marks and all are compulsory.

(SEMSTER-I) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. 42(177) PAPER-II NATURE CURE PHILOSOPHY (PRAKRITIK CHIKITSA DARSHAN) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT-I CONTENTS : Naturopathy (Naturo-Pathya-Vigyanam): Its meaning, definitions according to different naturopathy pioneer Bhartiya as well as other countries specially Dr. M Jassawala, Dr. K.R. Diskash, Dr. V.Venkat Rao, Dr. Sardar S.J. Singh, Dr. H. Lindlahar, Dr. H. Benjanain, Dr.Bendict lust etc., and its importance in Human life. UNIT-II CONTENTS: Basic 10 Principals of Naturopathy, Definitions of Nature cure, Health Disease, healing and disease crises, Toxic matter theory according to Dr. H. Lindlarhar and Basic principles. UNIT-III CONTENTS: Nature-cure, Panch-Mahabhuta and Vishudha-Ayurveda relations, what is shad- mahabhuta, Swakalp. - Bhavna, Panchkosh and body, effect of Paryavaran on the Human. - Body, Nature-cure and Panch-mahabhuta. UNIT-IV CONTENTS: Life History of some naturopathic pioneer’s- Dr. H Lindlahar, Vincent Priessnitz, Leuis Kuhna, Dr. Sardar S.S. Singh, Dr. K.R. Pilkash Dr. V. Venkata Rao, Dr. V.D. Modri, Dr. V. Krishanm Raju, Mahatma Gandhiji. UNIT-V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 02 marks and all are compulsory.

(SEMSTER-I) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER- III BASIC PHYSIOTHERAPY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The 42(178) candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each.

UNIT-I CONTENTS: An introduction to Movements, Exercise therapy, Active movement, Passive movements, starting positions, derived positions, assisted exercises, resisted exercises. UNIT-II CONTENTS: Types, location, direction & Magnitude of Motion, Definition of Forces, Force of gravity, Line of gravity, ground reaction force, Equilibrium, Levers, Work etc. UNIT-III CONTENTS: Joint structure, types of joints, function of joints, joint mobility, General effects of disease, injury and immobilization on joints. UNIT IV CONTENTS: Muscles structure, function, general effects of immobilization, injury, ageing on Muscles, Manual Muscle testing (MMT). UNIT-V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

(SEMSTER-I) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-IV BASICS OF ANATOMY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT-I 42(179) CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Gastro intestinal tract with diagramme i.e. oral cavity, esophagus, stomach, small and large intestine, liver & gall bladder. UNIT-II CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of respiratory system with diagramme i.e. nasal- passage, trachea, lungs and diaphragm. UNIT-III CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Heart & Blood vessels with diagramme i.e. Heart, Pericardium, aorta and its branches, coronary artery, veins and artery of the body. UNIT-IV CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of urinary system with diagramme i.e. kidney, ureter, Urinary bladder, urethra and related glands. UNIT-V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

(SEMSTER-I) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER -V BASIC PHYSIOLOGY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT-I CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of physiology of Digestive system and name of Diseases (i.e. chewing, digestion, assimilation & excretion). UNIT-II 42(180) CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Respiratory system and name of diseases (i.e. process of mechanism of breathing and uses of oxygen in the body. UNIT-III CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Heart and blood vessels and name of diseases (i.e. function of blood pumping and transportation of blood in the body via arteary and veins. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of urinary system and name of diseases explain (i.e. mechanism of urine formation and excretion from the body).

UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

M.A- YOGA AND HEALTH THERAPY (SEMSTER-II) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-I YOGA PHILOSOPHY (YOG- DARSHAN) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT-I CONTENTS: What is the meaning and explanation of Karmyog and Ashtang-yog according to Shrimadbhagwat Geeta and other’s yogic literature. Yog-philosophy according to Upanishad, Ved’s, Ayurved, Ramayan and Meemansha etc. UNIT-II

42(181) CONTENTS: Explanation with scientific approach of asna’s according to different yogic text i.e. Swami Charandas, Gherand Samhita, Kaivalyadham, Guru-Gorkshnath, Swami Swatmaram, V.K.S. Ayanger and Munger Publications. Mahrishi Patanjali, Swami Swatmajan. UNIT-III CONTENTS: What is pranayam Philosophy according to different yogic texts such as Mahrishi patanjali, Swami Charandas, Gherand Samhita, Guru- Gorakshnath and Swami-Swatmaram. UNIT-IV CONTENTS: What are Pratyahar, Dhyan, Dharna and Samadhi according to different yogic tents and modern yogic-literature. UNIT-V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 02 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL : Ext. MM. - 50

1. Project work according to theory 05 2. Lesson Plan according to theory 10 3. Practice of Shatkarma, Suryanamaskar and Yogic 10 Sukshma and Sthula Vyayam Dheerendera Bramhchari and Pawan-Muktasana yogic series according to Munger Publication 4. Practice of Pranayam 05 5. Viva 20

42(182) (SEMSTER-II) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS

. PAPER - II NATURECURE PHILOSOPHY (PRAKRITIK CHIKITSA DARSHAN) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Explanation of Jal Mahabhuta Techniques in detailed and its methods and uses in the therapy. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Explanation of Prithvi Mahabhuta Techniques in detailed and its Methods and uses in the therapy. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Explanation of Agni Mahabhuta and chromotherapy techniques in Detailed and its methods and uses in the therapy. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Explanation of Vayu and Akash mahabhuta techniques in detailed and its methods and uses in the therapy. What is the Massage and Accupressure and its uses. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. 1st semester practical work show 10 2. Identification of Naturopathy apparatus and uses 10 3. Lesson plan 10 4. Viva 20

42(183) (SEMSTER-II) M.M-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

Paper -III BASIC PHYSIOTHERAPY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Interferential current therapy, Ultrasonic therapy, TENS, Hydro- Collateral bath, Wax bath Traction. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Tilt table, paralled bar, shoulder wheel and pulley, quadriceps table, Finger-ladder exercises, theraband & theratubes UNIT -III CONTENTS: Good & bad posture, posture assessment, pillow placements for general body relaxation. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Grading of Joint mobilization, suspension therapy unit, Goniometry.

UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. 1st semester practical work show 10 2. Practical work from the above mentioned chapters 10 3. Lesson plan 10 4. Viva 20

42(184) (SEMSTER-II) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER -IV BASICS OF ANATOMY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Endocrinal system with diagramme i.e. Pitutary Thyroid, para thyroid, thymus, pancrease, adrenaline, testies & ovary. UNIT - II CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Eye and Ear with diagramme i.e. Iris, retina, pupil, Conjuctiva, eye ball ext. and int., ear outer, middle and inner part. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Genital system with diagramme i.e. ovary, uterus, vagina, testies and related organs. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Blood with diagramme i.e. RBC, WBC, HB, platelets, plasma etc. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

4. As per theory 10 2 Identification of organs 20 3 Viva 20

42(185) (SEMSTER-II) M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER -V BASIC PHYSIOLOGY *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT -I CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of physiology of Endocrinal system and its diseases (i.e. pitatary, thyroid, parathyroid, pancreas, adrenal, ovary and testosterone its function. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of Eye, Ear and name of diseases (i.e. mechanism of Vision and listening. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Basic knowledge of blood and name of diseases (i.e. functions of blood and formation of blood in the body. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Measurement and record of vital data i.e. B.P., P.R., R.R., Temperature, Weight, water input & output, calories requirement and consumption, What is effect of exercises on above. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. As per theory 10 2. Uses of stethoscope, B.P. apparatus, Thermometer and weighing chart 20 3. Viva as per theory 20

42(186) M.A - YOGA AND HEALTH THERAPY

SEMESTER-IIIrd.

M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-I YOGA & THERAPEUTIC TECHNIQUES (KRIYATMAK YOG) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Explanation of Sthula (Five), Sukshma Vyayam (48 nos.) according to Dheerendra Bramchari and using according to diseases. UNIT –II CONTENTS: Detailed of Suryanamaskar-some important Asnas i.e. Sheershasan, Sarvang, Hal, Pascchimottan, Ushtra, Bhujang, Bhadra, Matyendra, Matsya, Padma, Siddha, Vajra, Shashak, Nauka, Utthanpad, Merudand, Gingha, Chakta, Goraksha, Gomukh, Akarna-Dhanu and how to use in the different type of diseases. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Explanation and therapeutic uses of Mudra (Hast & all other’s according to Gherand Samhita) UNIT- IV CONTENTS: Explanation and therapeutic uses of Bandha, Nad and Kriya yog according to Yogic text, Swar sadhna. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

42(187) SEMESTER-IIIrd. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-II NATUROPATHY (PRAKRITIK CHIKISTSA) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: What is diet, Balanced Diet, Ahar, Ritucharya, Bemel Bhojan, Water Drinking method and purification, Eating technique and Hygienic food and unhygienic food and Antioxidents. Balanced diet for different groups-child, mother, old age and young age. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Explanation & uses of Carbohydrates, Protein and fat in different Kinds of ailments in the human body. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Explanation and uses of vitamins, Minerals, Salts and toughs in different kinds of ailments in the human body. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: What is sprouted and uses, juices, soup and its uses in treatment, ideal cooking of food for healthy living. How to uses of spices groups in Cooking of different. Kinds of food items and its importance. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

42(188)

SEMESTER –IIIrd. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

Paper-III PHYSIOTHERAPY MANAGEMENT *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Instructing the patient, general assessment of patient, treatment planning. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Description of Gait, its determinants, Gait cycle, Pathological gaits, Gait training, indication and contraindication of Heating & Cooling. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Progressive resisted exercises, breathing exercises, joint mobility exercises, uses of mobilization etc. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Massage – classification, techniques, uses of co-ordination, coordination exercises, general balancing exercises. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

42(189)

SEMESTER- IIIrd. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-IV PATIENT REHABILITATION *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Introduction of rehabilitation, rehabilitation team, delivery of Rehabilitation care. UNIT -II CONTENTS: Socio-legal aspects of rehabilitation, vocational rehabilitation, Architectural barriers, Activities of daily living. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Pain-Introduction and purpose, Aetiology, classification, pain pathways, receptors, pain gate theory, evaluation of the patient with pain. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: Mobility aids, orthosis, upperlimb and lower limb, prosthesis

UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

42(190) SEMESTER-IIIrd. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-V HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: How to manage treatment section of Naturopathy, Yoga & Physio- Therapy I.e. Treatment timing, cleaning, ventilation, Hygiene, Sanitation, Attendant, Treatment accessories of different types of Therapy, power supply, water supply etc. UNIT -II CONTENTS: How to manage Indoor patient department i.e. Receiving & Welcome, Bed Making, Hygiene, Sanitation, Water, Admit and Discharge, timings, Recreation, Sports, any first aid, washing daily necessary required articles. UNIT -III CONTENTS: How to manage outdoor patient department, i.e. Receiving & Welcome, treatment, Security, Changing & locker room, proper Hygiene & sanitation, water and power supply. UNIT -IV CONTENTS: How to increase income and control on expenditure. Proper management UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory.

42(191) M .A. - YOGA AND HEALTH THERAPY

SEMESTER-IVth. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-I KRIYATMAK YOG (YOGA & THERAPEUTIC TECHNIQUES) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: What is Shatkarma in Gheranda Samhita. Explanation and uses of Shatkarma in different kinds of ailments. UNIT –II CONTENTS: Explanation and scientific approach of Pranayam in different kinds of Human ailments according to VKS Ayenger, Kaivalya dham, Munger publication and its effect. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Explanation of different type of Dhyan according to uses i.e. Om Sahaj Bhavateet, Nasikagra, Chakra, Vipashyana, Prekshha, dhyan. How to uses of Dhyan in stress management. Uses of Music Meditation. UNIT IV CONTENTS: Explain the psychology of yoga according to available different literature. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. As per I & II Semester. 05 2. Lesson plan 05 3. Yoga class taking & Demonstration as per theory. 20 4. Viva as per theory 20

42(192)

SEMESTER-IVth. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-II NATUROPATHY (PRIKRITIK CHIKITSA) *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Treatment of disease through Naturopathy Techniques of Digestive System diseases i.e. Constipation, Acidity, Diarrhoea, Piles, Ulcer’s of stomach and intenstine, Collitis, Pyorrhoea and Sorethroat. UNIT –II CONTENTS: Treatment of diseases through Naturopathic Techniques of Chest Problems i.e. Asthma, Tuber culosis of Lungs, Bronchitis, Common cold, Pleurisy, chest pain, Angina, Ribs pain and liver disease. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Treatment of - Paralysis, Sciatica, Osteoarthritis, Lumber & Cervical, Spondilitis, joints pain, Gout, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Headache, High & low Blood Pressure, Anemia, Eye, Ear and Skin and boils. UNIT- IV CONTENTS: Treatment of -Diabetes, obesity, Menopausal Syndrome, Thyroid, fever, Insomnia, Depression and Daily life injuries i.e. Burn, sting, Bites, wound, fractures, drawning etc. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. Project work according to theory. 10 2. Lesson plan according to theory. 10 3. Demonstration of therapeutic 10 methods as per theory. 4. Viva as per theory 20

42(193)

SEMESTER-IVth. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-III PHYSIOTHERAPY MANAGEMENT *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV & V consists of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the V unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Stretching Exercises, Treatment plan for the osteoarthritis, low back pain, frozen shoulder, cervical spondylities. UNIT –II CONTENTS: Rice protocol for the acute injury & Treatment of chronic conditions. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Relaxed passive movements, Active exercises, relaxation techniques. UNIT- IV CONTENTS: Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Rehabilitation (PNF) UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. Project work according to theory. 10 2. Lesson plan according to theory. 10 3. Demonstration of therapeutic methods 10 as per theory. 4. Viva as per theory 20

42(194)

SEMESTER –IVth. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS.

PAPER-IV PATIENT REHABILITATION *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: Gait training using crutches and cane physical agents used in treatment of pain. UNIT –II CONTENTS: Rehabilitation of the patients with cerebralpalsy, stroke, poliomyelitis, Burns, fractures. UNIT -III CONTENTS: Role of physiotherapist in rehabilitation, rehabilitation of cardio- Respiratory dysfunctions. UNIT- IV CONTENTS: Ergonomic advice, principles in management of communication impairments. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL EXT.MM-50

42(195) SEMESTER-IVth. M.M.-80 INT. -20 TIME- 3 HRS. PAPER-V HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT *NOTE:Paper setter is required to set 02 questions from each unit I,II,III, IV. Unit Vth. Will consist of 10 questions of short answer distributed all over the syllabus. The candidates required to attempt one question from each unit having 15 marks and the Vth. unit is compulsory for all consisting 02 marks each. UNIT – I CONTENTS: How to proper arrange of instruments without any obstruction to the patients and space. Recreation for patient, how to create cheerful atmosphere of treatment section, How to create stress free atmosphere of Hospital, proper uses of time of patients and attendant. UNIT –II CONTENTS: How to manage kitchen i.e. proper supply of juice according to patient requirement on time, cooked vegetable, quantity, proper identification, looking attractive, good taste, dining hall sitting area, proper ventilation and atmosphere around the dining hall, timely arranged all food items without delay. UNIT -III CONTENTS: How to manage sell counter of Hospital, proper dress of Hospital workers, patients etc., cleaning dusting, gardening of each area, notice board, today slogan display and display of proper instruction daily, patient Nos. & disease of the patient display board daily. UNIT IV CONTENTS: Daily prayer arrangements, guest lecturer and doctors lecture arrangement timely, proper nursing of patient, take-care of patient and with his/her attendant, maintenance of instrument time to time, B.E.P., Timely launched new programme in Media. UNIT -V CONTENTS: Short type of 10 questions selected from I to IV units. Each have 2 marks and all are compulsory. PRACTICAL Ext. MM. - 50

1. Project work according to theory. 10 2. Lesson plan according to theory - 10 3. Demonstration of therapeutic methods as per theory. 10 4. Viva as per theory 20

42(196) PAPERS OF B.A. IN

YOGA & NATUROPATHY

SEMESTER –I to VI.

Ist Sem No. of Theory Paper-I Introduction of Yoga Marks 60 No. of Practical Paper – I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100 IInd Sem No. of Theory Paper – I Marks 60

Basics of Naturopathy No. of Practical Paper – I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100

IIIrd Sem No. of Theory Paper – I 60

Introduction to Hatha Yoga No. of Practical Paper – I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100 IV Sem No. of Theory Paper – I Naturopathy-II 60 No. of Practical – I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100

Vth Sem No. of Theory Paper – I 60 Science of Hatha Yoga No. of Practical – I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100 VIth Sem No. of Theory Paper – I Common Problem & Yoga Therapy & Naturopathy 60 Treatment No. of Practical –I 25 Internal Assessment 15 (20%) Total 100 Grand Total 600

Ist Semester THEORY PAPER

PAPER – IST 42(197) INTRODUCTION OF YOGA

I – SEMESTER M.M: 100 Marks Theory : 60 Marks Time : Three hours Int. Assessment :15 Marks Practical : 25 Marks Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III, IV &V. The paper setter will set two question from each unit. The candidate will attempt five question in all selecting at least one question from each unit. All question carry equal marks.

Unit-I Introduction of Yoga –Meaning and definition of yoga.

Objective of Yoga

Types of Yoga, Relevence of Yoga in Modern age. Unit – II Yoga in different texts –

Veda, Sankhya, Upnishads, Geeta Unit – III Types of Yoga : - Its brief introduction

• Hatha Yoga • Bhakti Yoga • Karma Yoga

• Ashtang Yoga Unit – IV Life Sketch of Ancient Contemporary Yogies and yoginies of India

• Swami Vivekananda • Sri Aurobindo • Swami Shivananda • Meera Bai • Sharda Maa

• Shri Maa Unit – V Introduction of contemporary Yog Institutes of India

1. Bihar Yoga Bharti Yog Institute – Munger, Bihar. 2. Kaivalya Dham – Lonavala 3. Gurukul Kangari University – Hardwar 4. Swami Vivekananda Institute of Yoga & Research, Banglor.

Reference Books 1. Science of Yoga – Swami Vigyananand Saraswati 2. Yog Mahavigyan – Dr. Kamakhya Kumar 3. Yog Dharshan – Swami Niranjananand Saraswati 4. Bhartiya Dharshan – Acharya Baldev Upadhyaya 5. Yogank – Geeta Press Gorakhpur

6. Kalyan – Geeta Press Gorakhpur

42(198) YOGA PRACTICAL

Unit – I Prayer, Mantra – Stuti - Gayatri Mantra, Prayer 2 Unit – II Shat Karma - Jala Neti, Raber Neti 4 Unit – III Asanas : Pawan Mukta, I, II, III, Surya Namaskar, Tadasan, Trikonasana, 7 Padhastasana, Kati Chakrasana, Padmasana, Swastikasan, Siddhasan Unit – IV Pranayama – Nadi Shodhan, Anuloma – Viloma 5 Unit – V Meditation – Om recitation 2

42(199) IInd Semester

THEORY PAPER

BASICS OF NATUROPATHY

M.M: 100 Marks Theory : 60 Marks Time : Three hours Int. Assessment :15 Marks Practical : 25 Marks Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III, IV &V. The paper setter will set two question from each unit. The candidate will attempt five question in all selecting at least one question from each unit. All question carry equal marks.

Unit-I Meaning of Naturopathy

Definition of Naturopathy

Principles of Naturopathy Unit – II Hydrotherapy

General Principles of Hydrotherapy

Importance of water

Properties of water Unit – III Introduction of Mud Therapy

Types of Mud Therapy

Action & reaction of Mud Therapy Unit – IV Fasting

Meaning of fasting

Types of Fasting

Benefits of Fasting Unit-V Massage Therapy :

History of Massage, Types of Massage, Steps of Massage

Reference Books 1. izkd`frd vk;qfoZKku & MkW jkds'k ftUny 2. Acupressure – Dr. Attar Singh

42(200) 3. ty fpfdRlk & MkW ghjk yky

4. miokl fpfdRlk & Jh cuZj eSdQsMu

5. miokl ds ykHk & MkW foV~Bynkl eksnh

PRACTICAL PAPER

Prayer, Mantra

MM : 25

Unit – I Shat Karmas –

Jala Neti, Rubber Neti, Kunjal Unit – II Asanas :-

Surya Namaskar, Trikonasan, Ardhchandrakarsan, Garudasan, Veerasan, Padangusthan, Sheeshpadanqushthasan, Utkatasan, Baddhpadmasan, Vakrasan, Mandukasan, Shashank, Pawan Muktasan, Ardhhalasan, Shalbhasan, Bhujangasan, Ardhdhanursan, Naukasan, Pashchimotanasan. Unit – III Pranayam – Bhastrika Pranayam, Sheetali, seetkari

42(201) IIIrd Semester

INTRODUCTION TO HATHA YOGA

Unit-I Meaning of Hatha Yoga

Step of Hatha Yoga

Objectives of Hatha Yoga Unit – II Proper Diet in the Practice of Hatha Yoga

Proper Place for the Practice of Hatha Yoga

Proper Time for the Practice of Hatha Yoga

With the reference of Hatha Yogic Grantha Gherand Sanhita & Hatha Yog Pardipika Unit – III What are the Sadhak Tatwa

What are the Badhak Talwas

Special reference to Gherand Samhita & Patanjal Yoga Sutra. Unit – IV Meaning of Prana

Types of Prana

Importance & Place of Prana in Human body Unit – V Types of Chakras

Location of Chakras in Human body

Meaning of Kundaline

Role of Kundiline in Human Life.

Reference 1. Hathyoga Pardipika – Swami Swatmaram 2. Gherand Samhita – Gherand Muni 3. Asan Pranayam Vigyan – Dev Varth Acharya 42(202) 4. Asan Pranayam, Mudra Bandh – Swami Satyanand 5. Poorna Yoga – Iyenger

6. ljy ;ksxklu & MkW bZ'oj Hkkj}kt

MM : 25

PRACTICAL PAPER

Unit – I Shatkarma – Jalneti, Rubberneti, Kunjal, Agnisar Kriya Unit – II Asanas – Surya Namaskar (with Mantras) Vatayan, Natraj, Ek padhastasna, Standing Chakrasan, Matsyasan, Gupt Padmasan, Vajrasan, Suptvajrasan, Matsyendrasana (Ardh) Gomukhasan, Akarndhanurasan, Singh Garjanasan, Vrikshasana, Kukkutasan, Tulankulasan, Garbhasan, Hirdaystambhasan, Setubandhasan, Sarvangasan. Unit – III Prayayam – Ujjayi, Kevali, Sury Bhedan, Chandra bhedhan, murchha Unit – IV Meditation

42(203) IVth Semester THEORY PAPER

NATUROPATHY - II M.M: 100 Marks Theory : 60 Marks Time : Three hours Int. Assessment :15 Marks Practical : 25 Marks Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III, IV &V. The paper setter will set two question from each unit. The candidate will attempt five question in all selecting at least one question from each unit. All question carry equal marks.

Unit-I Introduction of Diet

Types of Diet

Balance Diet

Concept of Vegetarian Diet Unit – II Meaning of Diet Therapy

Diet in different age groups

Elements of Diet – Protein, Fat, Carbohydrates, Water, Vitamins Unit – III Acupressure –

Meaning of Acupressure

Principles of Acupressure

Location of different points in hands Unit – IV Sun Therapy -

Introduction of sun therapy

Benefits of sun therapy

Sun therapy in common problems – obesity, gout Arthritis, skin problem Unit-V Colour Therapy – Meaning of colour therapy, uses of colour therapy in common problems – Diabetes, Arthritis, Constipation. Reference Book 1. izkd`frd vk;qfoZKku & MkW jkds'k ftUny 2. Acupressure – Dr. Attar Singh

3. vkgkj rFkk iks"k.k ,oa ekuoh; fodkl & MkW

lUrks"k 'kekZ

42(204) 4. lw;Z fdj.k fpfdRlk & MkW ghjk yky

5. izkd`frd fpfdRlk fof/;ka & MkW dqyjatu

eq[kthZ

6. jax fpfdRlk & iafMr Jh jke 'kekZ vkpk;Z

PRACTICAL PAPER MM:25

Unit – I Kriyas – Jal Neti, Sutra neti, Jal Kapal, Tratak Unit – II Asan :- Surya Namaskar, Purn Chakrasan, Samkonasan, Dwikonasan, Yogmudrasan, Poorna Matsyendra, Utthit Paschhimotansan, Vibhaktapashchhimotansan, Meruvakrasan, Parivirti Janusheerasan, Padam sarvangasan, Parvatasan, Ek Padasan, Raj Kapotasan, Ek Pad Skandhasan, Gorakshasan, Naukasan, Padambakasan, Kurmasan. Unit – III Pranayama :- Murchha Pranayama, Kevali Pranayamas.

42(205) 42(206) Vth Semester

SCIENCE OF HATHA YOGA

BENEFITS OF YOGIC PRACTICES

Introduction of Shatkarma

Unit-I Physiological benefits of Shatkarma

Psychological benefits of Shatkarma

Physical & mental benefits of – Neti

Physical & metal benefits of Dhauti Unit – II Physiological Benefits of Asanas

Psychological Benefits of Asanas Unit – III Physiological Benefits of Pranayama

Psychological Benefits of Pranayama Unit – IV Physiological Benefits of Mudra &

Psychological Benefits of Mudra & Unit – V Physiological Benefits of Meditation

Psychological Benefits of Meditation Reference 1. Anatomy & Physiology & Yogic Practices – Dr. M.L. Gharote and Prof. S.K. Ganguly 2. Yoga Therapy – Dr. M.L.

3. è;kura=k ds vkyksd esa 4. Meditation – N.C. Panda

5. ?ksj.M lafgrk & ?ksj.Meqfu

42(207) MM : 25

V– SEMESTER

PRACTICAL

Unit-I Prayer Unit-II Aasnas : Surya Namaskar, Trikonasan, Ardhchandrakarsan, Garudasan, Veerasan, Padangusthan, Sheeshpadanqushthasan, Utkatasan, Baddhpadmasan, Vakrasan, Mandukasan, Shashank, Pawan Muktasan, Ardhhalasan, Shalbhasan, Bhujangasan, Ardhdhanursan, Naukasan, Pashchimotanasan, Surya Namaskar (with Mantras) Vatayan, Natraj, Ek pad pad hostasan, Standing Chakrasan, Matsyasan, Gupt Padmasan, Vayrasan, Suptvajrasan, Matsyendrasan (Ardh) Gomukasan, Akarndhanurasan, Singh Garjanasan, Vshtrasan, Kukkutasan, Tulankulasan, Garbhasan, Hirdaystambhasan, Setubandhasan, Sarvangasan. Unit-III Pranayama : Bhastrika Pranayam, Sheetali, seetkari Naturopathy Practical

Steam Bath

Arm & Foot bath

42(208) VIth Semester

COMMON PROBLEMS & YOGA THERAPY &

NATUROPATHY TREATMENT

M.M: 100 Marks Theory : 60 Marks Time : Three hours Int. Assessment :15 Marks Practical : 25 Marks

Note: The question paper will consists of five units I, II, III, IV &V. The paper setter will set two question from each unit. The candidate will attempt five question in all selecting at least one question from each unit. All question carry equal marks.

Unit-I What is Disease

What is Health

Types of Health Unit – II Yoga Therapy – Meaning

Need of Yoga Therapy in Modern time

Objective of Yoga Therapy

Precautions in Yoga Therapy Unit – III Common Problems :-

• Common cold symptoms & causes • Cough symptoms & causes

• Digestive disorders symptoms & causes Unit – IV Yoga Therapy in Common Problems :-

• Common cold & its yogic treatment • Cough & its yogic treatment

• Digestive disorders & its yogic treatment Unit – V Naturopathy treatment in common problems :-

• Common Cold • Cough • Digestive Disorders

References 1. jksx ,oa ;ksx & Lokeh f'kokuUn ljLorh 2. izkd`frd vk;qfoZKku & MkW jkds'k 42(209) ftUny

3. ty fpfdRlk & MkW ghjk yky

4. miokl fpfdRlk & Jh cuZj eSdQsMu

5. miokl ds ykHk & MkW foV~Bynkl eksnh

6. AsanPranayam, Mudra Bandh – Swami Satyanand

PRACTICAL PAPER

Yoga & Naturopathy

MM : 25

Unit – I Shatkarmas

- Jal Neti, Danda Dhauti, Varisar Dhauti, Trataka Unit – II Asanas & Pranayam

Aasnas : Surya Namaskar, Trikonasan, Ardhchandrakarsan, Garudasan, Veerasan, Padangusthan, Sheeshpadanqushthasan, Utkatasan, Baddhpadmasan, Vakrasan, Mandukasan, Shashank, Pawan Muktasan, Ardhhalasan, Shalbhasan, Bhujangasan, Ardhdhanursan, Naukasan, Pashchimotanasan, Surya Namaskar (with Mantras) Vatayan, Natraj, Ek pad pad hostasan, Standing Chakrasan, Matsyasan, Gupt Padmasan, Vayrasan, Suptvajrasan, Matsyendrasan (Ardh) Gomukasan, Akarndhanurasan, Singh Garjanasan, Vshtrasan, Kukkutasan, Tulankulasan, Garbhasan, Hirdaystambhasan, Setubandhasan, Sarvangasan.

Advanced Surya Namaskar, Medetative posture, Balancing Asanas, Forward Bending, Backward bending

Pranayama : Bhastrika Pranayam, Sheetali, seetkari Unit – III Naturopathy Practical

Steam bath, Sauna Bath, Spinal bath, Hip bath and Project

42(210) M.A. (EDUCATION)

w.e.f. Session 2011-12

Modification / Revision of M.A Education Syllabus of Semester System

The duration of the course leading to the Degree of Master of Arts (M. A.) in Education shall be of Four Semesters. In first year, there shall be two semesters consisting of five courses each. In the second and final year there will be two semesters consisting of four theory papers and one Dissertation/practicum cum Field work for all students. Theory papers will be of 100 marks each (80 marks for external evaluation and 20 marks for internal assessment). Dissertation will be of 100 marks (75 marks for Dissertation and 25 marks for Viva Voce). Field work will be of 50 marks. External and internal examiners will evaluate Dissertation and Field work jointly. Internal assessment will be based on one Class House test (10 Marks), one assignment (5 marks) and one Seminar (5 marks) in each paper.

In each theory paper, the candidates will be required to attempt five questions, including one compulsory question of short notes, in three hours.

SEMESTER-I

Course I: Philosophical Foundations of Education (Part one) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course II: Sociological Foundations of Education (Part One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course III: Psychological Foundations of Education (Part One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course IV: Research methods in Education (Part One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course V: Methods of data Analysis in Education (Part One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100

SEMESTER-II

Course VI: Philosophical Foundations of Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course VII: Sociological Foundations of Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course VIII: Psychological Foundations of Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course IX: Research methods in Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course X: Methods of data Analysis in Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100

42(211) SEMESTER-II I

Course-XI: Comparative Education and Curriculum development (part-one) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course- XII: Contemporary Issues in Indian Education (part-one) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course-XIII (Opt. i): Any one of the following: i. Special Education (Part-One). 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 ii Educational Measurement and Evaluation(Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iii Teacher Education(Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iv Computer Education (Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 v Adult and Continuing Education(Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 COURSE XIV: Optional II: Any one of the following- i Management and Administration Of Education (Part one) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 ii Educational Technology(Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iii Educational and vocational guidance: (Part one) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iv Mental Hygiene and Education(Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 v Economics of Education (Part-One) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100

The students will be asked to select topic of their dissertation during IIIrd Semester and will submit their dissertation alongwith field work report during IVth semester.

SEMESTER-IV Course XV: Dissertation (to be submitted at the end of IV Semester) 75(Dissertation)+25(Viva-Voce)

Dissertation will be compulsory for all regular students. The students will work under the guidance of a supervisor to be allotted by the chairman/Principal of the Department/College. The students will submit three copies of Dissertation to the Department/ College by 30th June of the session. The viva-voce will be held on a date to be fixed by the University.

Course XVI: Curriculum Development and Comparative Education (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 Course- XVII: Contemporary Issues In Indian Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 COURSE-XVIII (Opt. I): Any one of the following (i) Special Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 (ii) Educational Measurement and Evaluation (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 (iii) Teacher Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 (iv) Computer Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 (v) Adult and Continuing Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 COURSE XIX (Opt. i) Any one of the following:- i Management and Administration Of Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 ii Educational Technology(Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iii. Educational and Vocational Guidance (Part Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 iv. Mental Hygiene and Education (Part-Two) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100 v. Economics Of Education (part two ) 80(External)+20(Internal)=100

Course XX: Field Work 50 Marks

42(212) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER I COURSE I: PHILOSOPHICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION (PART ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

• Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- 1. define the concept of Education and Philosophy and explain the relationship between them. 2. write a critical note on contribution of Philosophy to the field of Education and Vice-Versa 3. describe the contribution of various Indian and Western Schools of Philosophy to the fields of Education 4. illustrate and explain the concept of Freedom and Equality and their relevance to the field of Education

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Education & Philosophy (a) Concept and definition (b) Nature (c) Relationship 2. Indian Schools of Philosophy: (a) Samkhya, (b) Vedanta (c) Nyaya, (d) Buddhism (e) Jainism (f) Islamic Traditions with special reference to Concept, Reality and Values and their educational implications

UNIT-II 3. Modern Concept of Philosophy (a) Analysis- Logical analysis (b) Logical empiricism (c) Positive relativism

UNIT-III 4. Western Philosophies: Major Schools. (a) Naturalism (b) Idealism 42(213) (c) Pragmatism with special reference to the concepts of Metaphysics, Epistemology, and Axiology; their educational implications for aims, contents and methods of education

UNIT-IV 5. Social Philosophy of Education (a) Freedom (b) Equality

SELECTED READINGS 1. Broudy, H.S(1977) Building a Philosophy of Education, New York: Kringer. 2. Brubacher, John S. (1969) Modern Philosphies of Education, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 3. Chandra, S.S; Sharma, R.K (2004) Principles of Education, New Delhi: Atlantic Publishers and Distributors. 4. Dewey, John (1966) Democracy and Education, New York: McMillan. 5. Durpis, A.M. (1972) Philosophy of Education in Historical Perspective, New Delhi: Thomason Press. 6. Hiriyana, M (1995) The Essentials of Indian Philosophy, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidas Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 7. Kneller, G.F. (1978) Foundations of Education, John Willey and Sons. 8. Narvene, V.S. (1978) Modern Indian Thoughts, New York, Orient Longmans Ltd. 9. Nigel, L., Smeyers. P., Smith, R., & Standish, P., (2003) The Blackwell Guide to the Philosophy of Education, Blackwell Publishing Ltd. 10. Pandey, R.S. (1982) An Introduction to Major Philosophies of Education, Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir 11. Pandey, K.P. (1983) Perspective in Social Foundations of Education, Ghaziabad: Amitash Prakashan. 12. Pandey, R.S. (1982) An Introduction to Major Philosophies of Education, Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir. 13. Park J. (Ed) (1963) Selected Readings in Philosophy of Education, New York: The MacMillan Company. 14. Rusk, Robert R. (1962) Philosophical Bases of Education, Warwick Square: University of London. 15. Sodhi, T.S. & Suri, Aruna (1998) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education, Patiala: Bawa Publication. 16. Saxena Swaroop, N.R. (2001) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education, Meerut: Surya Publication. 17. Taneja, V.R. (2002) Foundation of Education, Chandigarh: Mohindra Capital Publishers.

42(214) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER -I Course II: SOCIOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION (PART-ONE) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions. • Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each. COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) define meaning and concepts of Educational Sociology (2) explain the concept of social organization and factors effecting it (3) describe social interaction and their Educational implications (4) Write a critical note on meaning, nature & determinants of culture and role of education in cultural context (5) Illustrate the meaning and concept of social change with special reference to India (6) Justify social and economic relevance of Education

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Concept of educational sociology and sociology of education (a) Social organization and its concepts (b) Factors influencing social organization – folk ways, mores; institutions; values (c) Dynamic characteristics of social organization and its educational implications.

UNIT-II 2. Social interactions and their educational implications (a) Social group inter-group relationship – group dynamic (b) Social stratifications – concepts of social stratification and its educational implications.

UNIT-III 3. Culture: Meaning and nature (a) Role of education in cultural context (b) Cultural determinants of education (c) Education and cultural change. UNIT-IV 4. Social change: its meaning and concept with special reference to India. Concept of Urbanization, Modernization, Westernization and Sanskritisation with special reference to Indian society and its educational implications. • Social Mobility : Meaning, Kinds, Importance

SELECTED READINGS

1. Gore, M.S. (1984) Education and Modernization in India, Rawat Publishers, Jaipur 2. Hanighurst, Robert et al. (1995) Society and Education, Baston: Allyn and Bacon. 42(215) 3. Kamat, A.R. (1985) Education and Social Change in India, Bombay Samaiya Publishing Co., 4. Maubnhein K.(1962) An Introduction to sociology of Education, Routledge and Kegan Paul, London 5. M.H.R.D. (1990) Towards an Enlightened and Human Society. Department of Education , new Delhi 6. Mossish, Loor (1972), Sociology of Education:An introduction. George Lalen and Unwin, London 7. Pandey, K.P.(1983) Perspective in Social Foundations of Education, Amita Prakashan, Gaziabad 8. Saxena, S.((2001) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education. Meerut: Surya publications. 9. Singh, B.N.(2005) Education: Social Change and Economic Development, Jaipur: RBSA Publishers. 10. Sodhi, T.S.& Suri, Aruna (1998) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education, Patiala: Bawa Publication.

42(216) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER-I Course III: PSYCHOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To enable the student to- 1. understand concepts and principles of educational Psychology as an applied science. 2. outline the scope of educational psychology. 3. describe the process of growth and development. 4. understand the meaning and concepts of individual differences 5. explain meaning and concepts of gifted and mentally retarded children 6. understand the concept and characteristics of creativity & importance of creativity in education COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. (i) Meaning of Education and Psychology: (a) Relationship of education and psychology (b) Scope of Educational Psychology (ii) Methods of Educational Psychology: (a) Experimental (b) Clinical (c) Differential UNIT-II 2. Growth and Development during childhood and adolescence (a) Physical (b) Social (c) Emotional (d) Mental

3. Individual Differences: (a) Concept and areas. (b) Determinants: Role of heredity and environment in developing individual differences. (c) Implications of individual difference for organizing educational programmes.

UNIT-III 4. Gifted and Mentally Retarded Children: (a) Meaning and Characteristics. (b) Needs and Problems 42(217) UNIT-IV 5. Creativity: (a) Concept (b) Characteristics (c) Development of creativity (d) Importance of creativity in education

42(218) SELECTED READINGS

1. Abramson, Paul, R(1980).: personality , new York: Holt Rinehart and Winston 2. Allport, G.W. (1954), personality , New York, Holt, 1954 3. Allport, G.W. (1961): ‘Pattern and Growth in Personality’, New York: Rinehart and Winston 4. Andrews, T.W. (Ed.): (1961), Methods in psychology’, New York: John Wiely and Sons, Inc 5. Baller, Awrren, R. Charles, Don, C. (1962): The Psychology of Human Growth and Development , new York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston 6. Baurn, A., Newman, S.M West R., & Mc Manus C., (1997)Cambridge Handbook ofn Psychology , health & Medicine, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 7. Coleman, J.C. (1976), Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Bombay: D.B. Tarapoewwala Sons & Co. 8. Dicapro, N.S. (1974)Personality Theories, New York, Harper 9. Douglass, O.B. Holl and B.P. (1948): Foundations of Educational Psychology, New York: The Mac Millan Co. 10. Gagne, R.M.(1977): The conductions of learning, new York, Chicago, Holt, Rinehart and Winston 11. Gates A .T ET. Al.(1963) : Educational Psychology, New York: Mac Millan 12. Hilgard , E.R.: Theories of learning , New York: Appleton Century Crafts 13. Kundu, C.L. :Educational Psychology, Delhi Sterling Publishers, 1984 14. Kundu, C.L. & Tutoo, D.N.: Educational Psychology, new Delhi Sterling publishers Private Ltd., 1988 15. Shanker Udey, (1965)Development of personality 16. Talbott, J.A. Hales, R.E. & Yodofsky, S.G. (1994) Textbook of Psychiatry, New Delhi: jaypee Broterhs Medical Publishers (P) Ltd. 17. Talbott; J.A. Hales, R.E. & Yodofsy, S.G. (1994) Textbook of Psychiatry, New Delhi: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd. 18. Thorpe, G.L. & Olson, S.L. (1999) Behavior Therapy, Concepts , procedures and Applications, London: Allyn Bacon

42(219) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER-I Course IV: RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) Explain the methods of acquiring scientific knowledge through experience and reasoning (2) Define meaning, nature, scope and purposes of Educational Research (3) Describe the emerging trends in Educational Research (4) Illustrate meaning, criteria and sources for identifying the research problems (5) Describe the importune and various sources of review of related literature and hypothesis (6) Explain the types, tools and techniques of collection of data (7) Define concept of sample and population and steps ands types of sampling

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I

1. Methods of acquiring scientific knowledge: Tradition, experience, reasoning – inductive and deductive. 2. Nature and scope of educational research: (a) Meaning, nature and limitations. (b) Need and purpose of Educational Research (c) Scientific enquiry and theory development. (d) Fundamental, applied and action research. (e) Quantitative and qualitative research.

42(220) UNIT-II 3. Some emerging trends in educational research. 4. Formulation of research problem (a) Criteria and sources for identifying the problem. (b) Delineating and operationalizing variables. (c) Review of related literature: Importance and various sources including internet. (d) Developing hypothesis in various types of research.

UNIT-III 5. Collection of Data (a) Types of data: Quantitative and qualitative (b) Tools, techniques and Characteristics of a good research tool; (c) Questionnaire, (d) Interview, (e) Observation, (f) Projective, and (g) Socio-metric techniques.

UNIT-IV

6. Sampling: Concept of population and sample (a) Steps and Characteristics of a good sample. (b) Various methods of sampling: Probability and Non-probability. (c) Sampling errors and how to reduce them.

42(221) SELECTED READINGS

1. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998), The Science of Educational Research: A Source Book, Nirmal , Kurukshetra 2. Best, john W. and Kahn James V (1995), Research in Education, prentice Hall, New Delhi 3. Burns, R.B. (1991), Introduction to research in education , prentice Hall, New Delhi 4. Edward, Allen L (1968), experimental Designs in psychological Research, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, New York 5. Good, C.V. and Douglas, E. S. (1954), methods in Social Research , Mc Graw Hill, new York 6. Kerlinger, F.N. (1973), foundation of Behavioral Research, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, new York 7. Koul, Lokesh (1988), Methodology of Educational Research, Vikas, New Delhi 8. McMillan, James H. and Schumarcher, S. (1989), research on Education: A conceptual Introduction , Harper and Collins, New York 9. Mouly, A.J. (1963), the Science of Educational Research, Eurasia, New Delhi 10. Neuman, W.L. (1997), Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches , Allyn and Bacon, Boston 11. Travers, R.M.W. (1978), An introduction to educational research, Mcmillan, New York 12. Van Dalen, D.B.(1962), understanding Educational research , Mc Graw Hill , new York 13. Young, P.V. (1960), Scientific Social Surveys and research, prentice hall, new Delhi 14. Miller, D.C. & Salkind , N.J. (2002) handbook of Research Design and Social Measurement , Sage Publications , London 15. Ruane, Janet M (2004), Essentials of Research Methods to Social Science Research, Blackwell Publications Ltd. 16. Van Dalen D.B. (1962), Understanding Educational Research Mc Graw Hill, new York

42(222) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER-I Course V: METHODS OF DATA ANALYSIS IN EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions. • Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) Compute different types of Statistical measures. (2) Develop practical orientation involving selection of appropriate data analysis techniques. (3) explain and illustrate the concept & application of measures of central tendency dispersion & relative positions (4) Describe the meaning, assumptions, computation & uses of Non-Parametric tests i.e. Chi-square Test & Sign Test. (5) illustrate the meaning & significance of normal probability curve.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Nature of Educational Data (a) Quantitative and qualitative, Scales of measurement, Descriptive and Inferential statistics (b) Organization and graphical representation of data: frequency distribution, frequency polygon, histogram, ogive, smoothed frequency polygon. (c) Measures of Central Tendency: Concept, characteristics, computation and uses of Mean, Median, Mode.

UNIT-II 2. Measures of Dispersion: Concept, characteristics, computation and uses of Range, Quartile Deviation, Average Deviation, Standard Deviation and Variance.

3. Measure of Relative Position: Percentiles and Percentile Ranks.

UNIT-III 4. Non-parametric Tests: Meaning, assumptions, computation and uses of: (a) Chi-square tests of equality and independence, setting up cross breaks for contingency table. (b) Sign test: - Concept, Assumptions & Computation & uses.

UNIT-IV 42(223) 5. Normal Probability Curve: Meaning, significance, (a) Characteristics and applications (b) Skewness and Kurtosis.

SELECTED READINGS

1. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998), Statistical Methods, Sterling, New Delhi 2. Edward, Allen L (1968), Experimental Designs in psychological research, Holt, Rinchart and Winston, New York 3. Ferguson, George A (1976). Statistical Analysis in psychology and Education , Mc Graw Hill, New York 4. Garrett, H.E. (1973), Statistics in psychology and Education , Vakils, Feffer and Simon, Bombay 5. Guilford, J.P. and Benjamin Fruchter (1973), Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education , Mc Graw hill , New York 6. Koul, Lokesh (1988), Methodology of Educational Research , Vikas, new Dekhi 7. Kurtz, A.K. and Mayo S.T. (1980), Statistical Methods in Education and Psychology, Narola, New Delhi 8. Neuman, W.L. (1977), Social Research methods: Qualitative and Quantative Approaches, Allyn and Bacon, Boston 9. Siegel, S. (1986) Non-Parametric Statistics, Mc Graw Hill, New York 10. Van Dalen D.B. (1962), Understanding Educational Research, Mc Graw Hill, New York 11. Glass , Genev & Hopkins, Kenneth D.(1996), Statistical Methods in Education and Psychology, A Simon & Schuster Company Needham Heights 12. Minium, E.W. King B.M. & Bear Gorden (1995), Statistical Reasoning in psychology & Education , John Willy & Sons Canada 13. Aron, Arthur & Avon. Elaine. No. Statistical for Psychology, A Simoin & Schuster Company , USA 14. Best, John W and Kahn James V,(2003)(, research in Education Prentice Hall, New Delhi

42(224) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER II COURSE VI: PHILOSOPHICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) write a critical note on the contribution of Indian Philosophers to contemporary Indian Education (2) justify the Impact of Value Education in our life (3) explain in detail the constitutional provisions for Education in India (4) write a critical note on the nature of knowledge & the knowledge getting process. (5) illustrate meaning, function of democracy & responsibility & their relevance in Education

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Western Philosophies: Major Schools. (a) Realism (b) Logical positivism (c) Existentialism (d) Marxism (e) Their educational implications with special reference to the concepts of metaphysics, epistemology, axiology; their educational implications for aims, contents and methods of education

UNIT-II 2. Contributions of following Indian Philosophers to Educational Thought: (a) Vivekananda, (b) Tagore, (c) Gandhi (d) Aurobindo, and (e) J. Krishnamurty

42(225) UNIT-III

3. Philosophical analysis of basic concepts of Education: Teaching, Instruction, Training and Indoctrination • Types and agencies of Education.

4. National Values as enshrined in the Indian Constitution and their Educational implication. 5. Constitutional provisions for Education.

UNIT-IV

6. Nature of knowledge, Types & sources of knowledge, and methods of acquiring knowledge.

7. Social Philosophy of Education – Democracy and Responsibility.

42(226) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER II COURSE VII: SOCIOLOGICAL FOUNDATION OF EDUCATION (PART TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) justify the stance of socially & economical disadvantaged sections of the society with a special reference to scheduled castes, scheduled tribes, women & rural population (2) understand the relationship of Education with democracy , freedom, National integration and international understanding (3) illustrate Education as a process of social system , socialization & social progress (4) explain Education as related to social equity and equality of Educational opportunity (5) describe social theories i.e. Marxism, integral humanism & functionalist with special reference to social change

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I (1) Social principles in education – social and economic relevance to education: (a) Socio-economic factors and their impact on education. (b) Socially and Economically disadvantaged sections of the society with special reference to Scheduled Castes, and Scheduled Tribe, women and rural population

UNIT-II (2) Education in relation to- (a) Democracy (b) Freedom, (c) Nationalism-national integration (d) International understanding.

UNIT-III (3) Education and Society: (a) As a process in social system (b) As a process of socialization, and (c) As a process of social progress. (d) Education and politics (e) Education and religion

UNIT-IV 42(227) (4) Educational opportunity and Equality and Equity: (a) Education as related to social equity, and equality of educational opportunities (b) Inequality of educational opportunities and their impact on social growth and development (c) Social theories (with special reference to social change) (i) Marxism, (ii) Integral Humanism (based on ‘Swadeshi’)and (iii) Functionalist- Emile Durkheim and Talcott Parsons

SELECTED READINGS

1. Gore, M.S. (1984) Education and Modernization in India. Rawat Publishers, Jaipur 2. Hanighurst, Robert et al. (1995)Society and Education , Allyen and Bacon, Baston 3. Kamat, A.R. (1985) Education and Social Change in India. Samaiya Publishing Co., Bombay 4. Maubnhein K. ET. Al. (1962)An Introduction to sociology of Education Rutledge and Kegan Paul, London 5. M.H.R.D. (1990) Towards an Enlightened and Human Society. Department of Education , new Delhi 6. Mossish, Loor (1972), Sociology of Education: introduction. George Lalen and Unwin, London 7. Pandey, K.P.(1983) Perspective in Social Foundations of Education, Amitash Prakashan, Gaziabad 8. Saxena, S.((2001) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education. Meerut: Surya publications. 9. Singh, B.N.(2005) Education: Social Change and Economic Development, Jaipur: RBSA Publishers. 10. Sodhi, T.S.& Suri, Aruna (1998) Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Educatio, Patiala: Bawa Publication.

42(228) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER - II Course VIII: PSYCHOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to- (1) understand nature & concept of intelligence (2) write a critical note of theories of intelligence (3) explain the measurement of intelligence (4) define the meaning and determinants of personality (5) describe the theories of personality (6) define the meaning and the theories of learning (7) illustrate the concept of motivation (8) explain he concept of mental health and metal hygiene, adjustment process

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I

1. Intelligence (a) Definition and nature of intelligence (b) Theories: (i) Two factor theory (spearman) (ii) Multifactor theory (iii) Group factor theory (iv) Guilford model of intellect (v) Hierarchical (c) Measurement of intelligence (two verbal and two non-verbal tests).

UNIT-II 2. Personality (a) Meaning and determinants (b) Type and Trait theories (c) Assessment of personality by subjective and projective methods.

UNIT-III 42(229) 3. Learning (a) Meaning (b) Theories and their educational implications: (i) Pavlov’s classical conditioning (ii) Skinner’s operant conditioning (iii) Learning by insight 4. Hull’s reinforcement theory (a) Lewin’s field theory (b) Gagne’s hierarchy of learning theory (c) Factors influencing learning

UNIT-IV

5. Motivation (a) Concept of motivation (b) Theories of motivation: (i) Physiological Theory (ii) Murray’s Need Theory (iii) Psycho-analytical Theory (iv) Maslow’s theory of hierarchy of needs (v) Factors affecting motivation

6. Mental health & mental hygiene (a) Adjustment and process of adjustment (b) Defence mechanism: Projection, substitution, sublimation, withdrawal, reaction formation and fixation

42(230) SELECTED READINGS

42(231) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER-II COURSE IX: RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION (PART-TWO) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions. • Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each. COURSE OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to- (1) write a critical note on major approaches to research (2) explain the research design (3) describe ethnographic, developmental and documentary analysis (4) illustrate the preparation of research synopsis (5) describe the writing of research report and evaluation of research report

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Major Approaches to Research (a) Descriptive Research (b) Ex-post facto Research (c) Laboratory Experiments (d) Field studies (e) Historical Research

UNIT-II 2. Research Designs: Concept, Scope, Nature (a) Survey Method (b) Experimental Method (c) Field Studies.

UNIT-III 3. Qualitative Research: (a) Ethnographic, Developmental, Documentary analysis (b) Validity and limitations of findings, factors influencing validity of research, how to increase validity of research findings

UNIT-IV 4. Research Report: (a) Developing a research proposal (synopsis). (b) Writing research report and evaluation of research report.

42(232) SELECTED READINGS

1. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998), The Science of Educational Research: A Source Book, Nirmal , Kurukshetra 2. Best, john W. and Kahn James V (1995), Research in Education, prentice Hall, New Delhi 3. Burns, R.B. (1991), Introduction to research in education , prentice Hall, New Delhi 4. Edward, Allen L (1968), experimental Designs in psychological Research, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, New York 5. Good, C.V. and Douglas, E. Scates (1954), methods in Social Research , Mc Graw Hill, new York 6. Kerlinger, F.N. (1973), foundation of Behavioral Research, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, new York 7. Koul, Lokesh (1988), Methodology of Educational Research, Vikas, New Delhi 8. McMillan, James H. and Schumarcher, S. (1989), research on Education: A conceptual Introduction , Harper and Collins, New York 9. Mouly, A.J. (1963), the Science of Educational Research, Eurasia, New Delhi 10. Neuman, W.L. (1997), Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches , Allyn and Bacon, Boston 11. Travers, R.M.W. (1978), An introduction to educational research, Mcmillan, New York 12. Van Dalen, D.B.(1962), understanding Educational research , Mc Graw Hill , new York 13. Young, P.V. (1960), Scientific Social Surveys and research, prentice hall, new Delhi 14. Miller, D.C. & Salkind , N.J. (2002) handbook of Research Design and Social Measurement , Sage Publications , London

42(233) M. A. (PREVIOUS) EDUCATION SEMESTER-II COURSE X: METHODS OF DATA ANALYSIS IN EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students will be able to- (1) explain the meaning, characteristics, assumptions, computation and uses of Product moment & Rank difference correlation (2) differentiate between Rank difference and product moment and partial & multiple correlation (3) illustrate the concept, assumptions and computation of regression & prediction. (4) explain & illustrate the concept & application of some tests of significance. (5) differentiate between the T-Test and ANOVA

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Correlations: Meaning, Characteristics, assumptions, computation and uses of: (a) Product moment correlation (b) Rank difference correlation (c) Partial and Multiple Correlations: Meaning, assumptions, computation and uses.

UNIT-II 2. Null hypothesis 3. Standard error, confidence limits 4. Type I and type II errors 5. One tailed and two tailed tests 7. Tests of significance: (a) Difference between means (b) Difference between percentage and proportions (c) Difference between correlations

UNIT-III 8. Regression and Prediction: Concept, assumptions and computation of linear regression equations, standard error of measurement.

UNIT-IV 9 The F-test 10. One way ANOVA: 42(234) (a) Meaning (b) Assumptions (c) Computation and uses

SELECTED READINGS

1. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998) Statistical Methods, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers. 2. Ferguson, G.A. (1976) Statistical Analysis in Psychology and Education, New York, McGraw Hill. 3. Garrett, H.E. (1973) Statistic in Psychology and Education, Bombay, Vakils, Feffer and Simon. 4. Guilford, J.P. and Benjamin, F. (1973) Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, McGraw Hill, New York. 5. Koul, L. (1988) Methodology of Education Research, New Delhi, Vikas Publications. 6. Kurtz, A.K. & Mayo, S.T. (1980) Statistical Method in Education and Psychology, New Delhi. 7. Neuman, W.L. (1977) Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantative Approaches, Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 8. Siegel, S. (1986) Non-Parametric Statistics, New York: McGraw Hill. 9. Glass, G. & Hopkins, K.D. (1996) Statistical Methods in Education and Psychology, Needham Heights, A Simon & Schuster Company. 10. Minimum, E.W., King B.M., & Bear, G. (1995) Statistical Reasoning in Psychology & Education, Cananda : John Willy & Sons. 11. Best, J.W. & Kahn J.V. (2003) Research in Education New Delhi, Prentice Hall.

42(235) M. A. (FINAL) SEMESTER III COURSE-XI: COMPARATIVE EDUCATION AND CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

• Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will be comprised of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Aquatint the student with educational systems in terms of factors and approaches of Comparative Education 2. Orient the students with skills to assess the efficiency of educational systems of various countries in terms of prevailing trends in those countries 3. Acquaint the students about the concept of Universalization of Primary Education and its implication for Indian Education. 4. Help the students to understand the concept of Secondary Education and its vocationalization. 5. Create a perspective in the students about the implications of Education for solving the prevailing problems of Education in India.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Concept and aims of Comparative Education 2. Need and scope of Comparative Education 3. Factors influencing Education System

UNIT-II 4. Historical Development of Comparative Education 5. Approaches of Comparative Education – Historical, Philosophical, Sociological and Problem approach 6. Salient features of Education system of U.S.A., U.K. & India

UNIT-III 7. Pre-Primary Education in U.S.A., U.K & India 8. Primary Education in U.S.A., U.K. & India (Aims, Content, Methods of Instruction and Evaluation system), Concept of Universalization of Elementary Education in India: its implications, District Primary Education Programme (DPEP) and Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA).

UNIT-IV 9. Secondary Education in U.K., U.S.A. & India 10. Vocalization of Secondary Education in U.K., U.S.A. & India 42(236) SELECTED READINGS

(1) Andrey, A. & Howard N. (1978). Developing curriculum: A practical Guide. London: George Allen and Unwin.

(2)Baradey, G.Z.F. (1964). Comparative methods in education. New Delhi: Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.

(3)Cramer, I.F. & Brown, G.S. (1965). Contemporary education: A comparative study of National System. New York: Harcourt Brace & Company.

(4)Dent, H.C. (1981). Educational system of England. London: George Allen and Unwon.

(5) Denis, L. (1986). School curriculum planning. London: Hodder ad Stoughton.

(6) Edward, A. K. (1960). The secondary schools curriculum. New York: Harper and Row Publishers.

(7) Hans, N. (1961). Comparative education. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.

(8) Harold A. & Elsic, J. A. (1957). The curriculum. New York: The MacMillan Company.

(9) International encyclopedia of curriculum. (1991) London: Pergamon Oxford.

(10) Sodhi T.S. (1988). A text book of comparative education New Delhi: Association of Indian Universities, IGNOU.

(11)Kandel, I.L. (1963). Studies in comparative education. New York: George Harrup.

(12)Parmaji, S, (1984). Distance education, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,

(13)Reddy, R. G. (1988). Studies in Distance Education Association of Indian Universities, Delhi New: IGNOU.

(14)William, M. A. (1966). Planning curriculum for schools. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

42(237) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III COURSE- XII: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN INDIAN EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Get a historical insight into the development of Education in pre-independence in India 2. Get the knowledge of the development of the Education in free India 3. Have a critical understanding of the development of Education as a distinct discipline

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Education in India during: • Vedic • Buddhist, and • Medieval period

UNIT-II 2. Maculay’s minutes and Bentick resolution of 1835 • Admam’s report and its recommendations • Wood’s Despatch of 1854 • Lord Curzen’s educational Policy, Growth of national consciousness, National Education movement

UNIT-III

3. Recommendations of Indian Education Commission 1882, its influence on the subsequent development of Education • Essential features of Sadler commission report – 1917 • Terms of reference & recommendations of Hartog Committee 1928-1917

UNIT-IV

42(238) • Wardha Scheme of education 1937 • Sargent Report 1944 • University Education Commission 1948-1949 • Secondary Education commission 1952-53

SELECTED READINGS

(1) Govt. of India, report of the University Education Commission, (1949) Vol-I, Simla.

(2) Niak J.P. (1963). The role of govt. of India, Ministry of Education.

(3) Nurullah S., Naik J.P. and Oad L.K. (1970). A student history of education in India, Mumbai: McMillan and Co.

(4) M.H.R.D, Report of the University Education Commission (1948), Ministry of Education, New Delhi, Govt. of India.

(5) M.H.R.D. Report of the Secondary Education Commission (1952). Ministry of Education, New Delhi, Govt. of India.

(6) M.H.R.D. Challenges of Education (1985). A policy perspective, Ministry of Education, New Delhi, Govt. of India.

(7) Shukla, P.D. (1969) Towards the New Pattern of Education in India, New Delhi Sterling Publishers.

42(239) M.A. (Education) SEMESTER III Course-XIII (Opt. i): SPECIAL EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- Students will be able to: 1. Define the concept of exceptional Children 2. Explain the needs and problems of Exceptional Children 3. Describe the meaning and scope of Special Education in India 4. Describe the meaning of Integrated / Inclusive Education 5. Explain various types of disabilities and their cause 6. Describe various types of educational programmers for exception children.

COURSE CONTENTS UNIT-1 1. Concept and content of Exceptionality and Special Education • Types of Exceptionality • Positive, Negative and Multiple deviations • Needs of Exceptional Children • Problems of Exceptional Children

2. Nature of Special Education • Objectives of Special Education • Historical perspective • Continuum of special education alternative programmers. • Scope of Special Education • Integrated / Inclusive Education

UNIT-II 3. Education of Orthopaedically Handicapped children • Concept • Etiology • Characteristics • Educational Programmes

UNIT-III 42(240) 4. Education of Mentally Retarded Children • Concept • Classification • Etiology • Educational Prgrammes for educable mentally retarded • Educational Prgrammes for trainable mentally retarded

UNIT-IV 5. Education of visually Impaired Children • Concept and Characteristics • Degree of Impairment • Etiology and Intervention • Educational Programmes

SELECTED READINGS 1. Bender, W.N. (1995). Learning Disability, London: Allyn & Bacon

2. Berdine, W.H. & Blackhurst A.E. (1980). An Introduction to Special Education, Boston: Herpes Collins publishers

3. Dash, M. (2007). Education of Exceptional Children, New Delhi: Atlantic Ppblisher and distributors (P Ltd.)

4. Dunn, L. & Bay, D.M. (Education.) (1973). Exceptional Children in the Shcools, New York: Holt, Rinehart Winston.

5. Hallahan D.P & Kauffman, J.M. (1991). Exceptional Children: Introduction to Special Education, London: Allyn & Bacon

6. Hewett, F.M. & Foreness S.R. (1994). Education of Exceptional Learners, London.

7. Jorden, T.E. (1977). The Exceptional Child, Ohio: Merrill

8. Kirk S.A. & Gallagher J.J. (2002). Education of Exceptional Children, Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co.

9. Magnifico, L.X.)1998). Education of the Exceptional Child, New York: Longmen.

10. Shanker, U. (1978). Exceptional Children, Jallandhar: Steering Publications.

11. Singh, N.N. & Beale. I. L. (1992). Learning Disabilities – Nature, Theory and Treatment, New York: Springer Verlag

12. Smith, C.R. (1991). Learning Disabilities- The interaction of learner, Task and Setting, Massachusetts, London: Allyn & Bacon

13. Strange, Ruth. (2004). Exceptional Children & Youth, N.J.: Prentice Hall.

42(241) M. A. (Education) SEMESTER III COURSE- XIII (Opt. ii): EDUCATIONAL MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- The students will be able to: (1) Acquaint the student with the basic concepts and practices adopted in educational measurement and evaluation. (2) Orient the students with tools and techniques of measurement and evaluation. (3) Develop skills and competencies in constructing and standardizing a test. (4) Make the students understand how various requirements of education are measured, evaluated, interpreted and their rules are recorded to help learners. (5) Develop the ability to explain and use appropriate statistical techniques and test of significance in measurement and evaluation.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Educational measurement and Evaluation • Concept, Scope and Need • Levels of measurement • Evaluation: functions and basic principals of evaluation • Inter-relationship between measurement and evaluation : use of taxonomic categories of educational objectives UNIT-II 2. Concept and Measurement of the following • Achievement tests • Aptitude tests • Intelligence tests • Attitude and Value scales • Interest inventories

UNIT-III 3. Tools of measurement & Evaluation • Essay type tests, objectives type tests • Questionnaire and schedule • Inventories • Performance tests

42(242) UNIT-IV 4. Analysis of Variance • Analysis of variance (up to two ways): Concept, assumptions, computation and uses

SELECTED READINGS

1. Adams, G.K. (1965), Measurement and Evaluation in Psychology, Education and Guidance, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, New York

2. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998), Statistical Methods: Concepts , Applications and Computation, Sterling, New Delhi

3. Aggarwal, R.N. and Asthana, Vipin (1983), Educational Measurement and Evaluation, Vinod, Agra.

4. Aiken, L.R. (1985), Psychological Testing and Assessment, Allyn and Bacon, Boston

5. Anastasi, A (1982), Psychological Testing, Mac Millan, New York

6. Cronbach, L.J. (1964), Essentials of psychological Testing, Harper and row, New York

7. Ebel, R.L. and Frisbe, D.A. (1990) Essentials of Educational Measurement, prentice Hall, New Delhi

8. Freeman, F.S(1965), Theory and Practice of Psychology Testing, Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1965

42(243) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III COURSE – XIII (Opt-iii) TEACHER EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to understand about the:- (1) Meaning and Concept of teacher Education in India (2) Aims and Objectives of teacher Education in India with its historical perspectives. (3) Teaching profession and types of teacher Education Programme (4) Different competencies essential for a teacher for effective transaction

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Meaning and concept of teacher Education 2. Historical Development of teacher Education 3. Recommendation of various commissions on Teacher Education with special emphasis on - • Kothari Commission • NPE 1986 • Programme of Action 1992

UNIT-II 4 Aims and Objectives of Teacher Education at • Elementary Level • Secondary Level • College Level

UNIT-III

5. Teaching as a profession 6. Aims and objectives of Teacher Organizations 7. Need of Professional Organizations 8. Faculty Improvement Programmes

UNIT-IV 9. Performance appraisal of teachers 10. Internship of Teacher Education 11. Pre-Service Teacher Education 42(244) 12. In-Service Teacher Education

SELECTED READINGS

1. CABE, (1992). Report of the CABE Committee on Policy Perspective Govt. of India, MHRD, New Delhi

2. Dunkin, J. Michal (1987) The International Encyclopedia of Teaching and Teacher Education, Pergamon Press.

3. Husen, Torsten & Postlethwaite (Eds.) (1994), The International Encyclopedia of Education, New York, Vol. 1-12, Pergamon Press

4. Mangla, Sheela (2000), Teacher Education: Trends & Strategies, New Delhi, Radha Publishing.

5. Ministry of Education (1964-66), Education and National Development Report of Indian Education Commission, Govt. of India

6. MHRD (1986) National Policy on Education and Programme of Action, Govt. of India, New Delhi

7. MHRD(1992) Programme of Action, Department of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi

8. Singh, L.C. (ed.) (1990) Teacher Education in India, Source Book NCERT, New Delhi.

9. Smith, E.R. (ed.) (1962)Teacher Education: A Reappraisal, New York, Harper & Row Publishers

10. Soder, R.(1991) “The Ethics of the Rhetoric of Teacher Professionalism”, Teaching and Teacher Education, 7(3)

11. Stiles, L.J. and Parker R.(1969) “Teacher Education Programmes”, Encyclopedia of Educational Research 4th Edition, New York, Macmillan

42(245) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III PAPER XIII (Opt. iv) COMPUTER EDUCATION (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: (1) Enable the students to explain the History of Computers (2) Enable the students to differentiate between single user & multi user operating system (3) Learn about origin of Artificial Intelligence & its applications (4) Learn about the application of MS Word & M.S. Excel.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Computer Basics • History of Computers • Types of Computer • Flow Diagram of Computer • Number system: Binary, Decimal, Octal and Hexadecimal

UNIT-II

2. Operating System • Meaning of Operating System • Need of Operating System • Types of Operating System-Single User and Multi-User

UNIT-III

3. Artificial Intelligence • Origin of Artificial Intelligence • Meaning of Artificial Intelligence • Applications of Artificial Intelligence • Artificial Intelligence and Education

UNIT-IV

42(246) 4. Application Oriented Information • Word Processing and its Creation – M.S. Word • Data Bases and its uses : Excel

SELECTED READINGS

1. Cox, J. and Urban, P. (1999). Quick courses in Microsoft Office, New Delhi, Galgotia Publications.

2. Jain, Satish, (1990). Introduction to Computer Science and Basic Programming, New Delhi, BPB Publications.

3. Rajaraman, V., (1996). Fundamentals of Computers, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.

4. Saxena, S, (1998). A first Course in computers, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

5. Sinha, P.K., (2003). Computer Fundamentals:, New York, BPB Publications

6. Tanenbaun, A.S., (1998) Computer Networks. New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.

42(247) M.A. (EDUCATION) (FINAL) SEMESTER-III COURSE – VIII (Opt. v): ADULT AND CONTINUING EDUCATION (PART-ONE) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions. •Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. •Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- Making the students to: 1. Understand the basic concept of Adult Education 2. Understand the developments taking place in the field of adult education in India 3. Understand the appropriate methods of teaching adults 4. Understand the major problems confronting Adult Education in India. 5. Obtain the understanding and information to organize Adult Education centre. 6. Understand the working of different agencies in continuing Adult Education Programme. 7. Use of different techniques of evaluation in Adult Education 8. Understand the methods and strategies of implementation of Adult Education Programme.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Concept, need, importance, objectives and scope of adult education, Distinction between: • Formal, informal and non-formal Education • Traditional Literacy and functional literacy

UNIT-II

2. Different approaches for imparting literacy – mass approach, selective approach and campaign approach. 3. Post-Literacy activities for neo-literates, literacy for neo-literates Problem of Drop –out and problem of relapse into literacy in the Indian context.

UNIT-III

3. National Policy on Education and Adult Education, National Literacy Mission, Jan Shikshan Nilayams. 4. Adult Learning – Characteristics of Adult Learners, Motivating Adults for Learning

UNIT-IV

5 Methods of Teaching Literacy- Traditional Method, Zero Method, Alphabetic, Integrated Literacy Method, Naya Severa Method and Ansari Method. 42(248) 6 Methods of Adult Education – Lecture, Discussion and Demonstration

7. Training of Adult Education Functionaries

SELECTED READINGS

1. Bordia, Anil, J.R. Kidd & J.A. Drapert (eds.) (1973). Adult Education in India – A Book of Readings, Bombay: Nachiketa Publications Ltd.

2. Bhatia, S.C. & Srivansava(1978). Literacy, Literacy Materials and their preparation: A General perspective, New Delhi: Directorate f Adult Education

3. Bhola, H.S. (1984) Campaigning for Literacy – Eight National Experiences of the Twentieth Century with a memorandum to decision makers, UNESCO, Paris

4. Coles, Edwin K. Townsend (1977). Adult Education in Developing countries, New York, Pergamon Press.

5. Cropley, A.J. (1977). Life Long Education: A Psychological Analysis, New York, Pergamon Press.

6. Dutta, S.C. (1987). Adult Education in the Third World, New Delhi and Criterion Publications

7. Dutta, S.C. (1973). Social Education and Social Balures in Adult Education in India, Bombay: Nachoketa Publications

8. Dutta, S.C. (1986). History of Adult Education in India, New Delhi, Indian Adult Education Association , 1986

9. Draper, James A (1989). Adult Education, A Focus for the Social Sciences, New Delhi: Indian Adult Education Association

10. Houle, Cyril, O (1964). Counting Your Education New York, Mc Graw Hill Co.

11. Indian Adult Education Association (1980). Handbook for Adult Education Instructors, New Delhi

12. Husan, T: International Encyclopedia of Education, New York, pergamon Press

13. Jarvis, Petet(1987). Twentieth Century Thinkers in Adult Education. London, Vroom Belm

14. Kundu, C.L.: Adult Education (1984). Principals, Practice and Persects, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers

15. Kundu, C.L. (1987). Adult Education Research: Future Directions, University

42(249) 16. Mathur, R.S. & Prem Chand(1981). Adult Education Programme: Analysis of Strength and Deficiencey, New Delhi, Indian Adult Education Association

17. Ministry of Human Resource Development: National Literacy Policy of Education, Govt. of India , New Delhi

18. Ministry of Human Resource Development,(1986) National Policy of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi

19. Mohsin, S.R. , J.L. Sachdeva & Asha Sehgal (1983) Adult Education Programme, New Delhi: Indian – Adult Education Association

20. Nimbalkar, M.R.(1987): Adult Education and its Evaluation System Delhi, Mittal Publications

21. Rogers, Alan (1986): Teaching Adults, England Open University, Press

22. Shab, S.Y. A Source Book on Adlut Education, New Delhi, Directorate of Adult Education

23. Sharan B. Merriam, Phyllis M. Cnningham (1989) Handbook of Adult and Continuing Education, Jossey Bass Publishers, San Francisco, London, 1989

24. Styler, W.eE.: Adult Education in India, Bombay : Oxford University Press, 1966

25. Yadav, R.S.: Adult Education – Concept, Theory and Practice, Associated Publishers, Ambala Cantt.

42(250) M.A. (EDUCATION) III SEMESTER COURSE XIV (Opt. i) MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF EDUCATION

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Acquaint the students with the concepts of education management along with their significance. 2. Help the students to understand educational management as a process at various levels. 3. Develop an understanding in students about education and problems of educational trends. 4. Help the students to know about resources of education and problems of educational finance. 5. Assist the students to learn about planning and organizing.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Meaning, Nature, scope, need and functions of Educational Administration. 2. Relationship among management, administration, supervision and planning.

UNIT-II 3. Developments of modern concepts of educational administration from 1900 to present day • Taylorism • Administration as a process • Human relations approach to Administration 4 Meeting the psychological needs of employees.

UNIT-III 5 Specific Trends in Educational Administration • Decision making • Organizational compliance • Organizational Development • PERT • Management by objectives (MBO)

UNIT-IV 6 Meaning, Need and Importance of Leadership • Theories of Leadership • Styles of Leadership

42(251) • Measurement of Leadership

SELECTED READINGS:-

1. Unruh, A. & Turner, E. (1970). Supervision for change and invocation. New York.

2. Bahtanagar, R.P. & Aggarwal, V. (2004). Educational Administration, Supervision, Planning and Financing. Merrut: R.Lall. Book Depot.

3. Harding, H. (1987). Management Appreciation. London: Pitman Publishing.

4. Ravishankar, S., Mishra, R.k., & Sharms, M.L. (1988). Human Resource Development. Bombay: Dhrav & Deep.

5. Shukla, P.D. (1983). Administration of Education in India. New Delhi: Vikas Publication.

6. Sinha, P.S.N. (ed) (2002). Management and Administration in Govt. New Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers.

7. Spears, H. (1955). Improving the Supervision of Instruction. N.Y.: Prentice Hall.

8. Wiles, K. (1955) .supervision for Better Schools. N.Y.: Prentice Hall.

42(252) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III PAPER XIV (Opt. ii) EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY (PART-ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Develop the understanding of concept, scope and characteristics of educational Technology 2. Enable the students to differentiate between hardware and software 3. Describe the difference among Teaching, Indoctrination, instruction and training. 4. Learn about different types of programmed instruction.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Meaning, Concept and scope of educational technology, Systems approach to Education and its characteristics.

UNIT-II

2. Components of Educational Technology –Hardware and software. 3. Multi-Media Approach in Educational Technology-Meaning, Uses and Limitation.

UNIT-III

4. Modalities of teaching – Teaching as different from indoctrination instructions, conditioning and training 5. Stages of teaching – Pre-active, Interactive and Post active 6. Teaching at different levels – Memory, understanding and reflective levels of organizing teaching and learning

UNIT-IV

7. Programmed Instruction: origin, principles and characteristics 8. Types : Linear, Branching and Mathetics 9. Development of a Programmed Instruction: Preparation, Writing, Try out and Evaluation

SELECTED READINGS

(1) Davies, I.K., “ The Management of Learning”, London: Mc Graw Hill, 1971 42(253) (2) Dececco, J.P., “The psychology of Learning and Instruction”, New Delhi, prentice Hall, 1988

(3) Kulkarni, S.S. (1986) Introduction to Educational technology”, New Delhi, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company.

(4) Kumar, K.L. (1996).Educational technology. New Delhi: New Age International Publishers.

(5) Locatis, C.N. and Atkinson, F.D. (1984) Media and technology for education and training. London: Charles E. publishing Co.

(6) Mavi, N.S. (1984). Programmed Learning-An Empirical Approach”, Kurukshetra , Vishal Publishers,

(7) Joyce, B. & Weil, M. (1992). Models of teaching. New Delhi: Prentice Hall.

(8) Merrit, M.D. (1971). Instructional design. New York:

(9) Mukhopadhyay, M.(1990). Educational technology. New Delhi: Sterling.

(10)Pandey, K.P. (1980). A first course in instructional technology. Delhi: Amitash Parkashan,

(11) Pandey, S.K. (1997). Teaching communication. New Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers.

(12) Pandey, K.P. (1997). Dynamics of teaching behavior. Gaziabad, Amitash Prakashan.

(13) Prcival, F. and Ellington, H. (1998). A handbook of educational technology. New York, Kogan Page.

(14) Skinner, B.F. (1968).The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton Century Crofts.

42(254) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III Course - XIV (Opt. iii) EDUCATIONAL AND VOCATIONAL GUIDANCE (PART ONE)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:-

The students will be able to: 1. Explain life and the world around. 2. Explain the importance of making right choice in life, education, vocation etc. 3. Describe the importance of working with a group, for a group and in a group. 4. Explain as every individual is capable of making some unique contribution to the all round growth and development of the society because of his unique potentialities. 5. Assess the needs of the individual correctly.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I

2. Concept, meaning, principles, need and importance of guidance. 3. Types of Guidance – Educational Guidance, Vocational Guidance and personal Guidance

UNIT-II 4. Organization of guidance services in schools – need, principles, steps & strategies for effective organization of Guidance services at school level.

UNIT-III

5. Group Guidance – Meaning, advantages, principles and kinds of group guidance. 6. Guidance of exceptional children – Physically Handicapped, Gifted and children with Behavioral Problems UNIT-IV

7. Counseling – Meaning, Need, Procedure and Types • Directive counseling – concept, advantages and limitations • Non-Directive Counseling-concept, advantages and limitations • Elective counseling – concept, advantages and limitations

SELECTED READINGS:

42(255) 1. Bernard, H. W & Daniel F.W. (1977). Principles of Guidance, Second Edition, New York – Thomas Y. Crowell Company.

2. Jones, J.A.: (1970). Principles of Guidance, Bombay: Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Miller, F.W. (1961). Guidance Principles and Services, Columbia : Ohio Merrill

4. Pandey, K.P. (2000). Educational and Vocational Guidance in India,Varanasi: Vishwa Vidyalaya Prakashan Chowk

5. Tolbert, E.L. (1967) Introduction of Counseling, New York: McGraw Hill.

6. Strang, Ruth. (1949). Counseling Technics in colleges and Secondary Schools, New York: Harpar

7. Taxler, A.E.(1964): Techniques of Guidance, New York: Mc Grwa Hill

8. Robinson, F.P (1950) Principles and Procedures in student counseling, New York: Harper & Brother

9. Super, D.E.,( 1949) Apprising Vocational Fitness, New York: Harper and Brother

42(256) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III COURSE –XIV (Opt. iv): MENTAL HYGIENE AND EDUCATION (PART-ONE) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all, out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

•Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. •Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- The students will be able to develop material for:- 1. Define concept of mental health and hygiene. 2. Develop material for good mental health for both teachers and students. 3. Explain principles and conditions conductive to good mental health. 4. Define measures for fostering good mental health among students. 5. Explain the interrelationship among personality adjustment and mental health. 6. Define the understanding of the role of home, school and society in mental health.

COURSE CONTENTS:

UNIT-I 1. Mental Health and Mental Hygiene:- • Concepts of Mental Health • Criteria of Mental Health • Concept of Wholesome and Abnormal Personality • Aspects, Goals and Principles of Mental Hygiene

UNIT-II 2. Adjustment:- • Concept and Process of Adjustment • Concept and Causes of Maladjustment • Adjustment Mechanism – Subtraction, Withdrawal, Compensation,. Sublimation, Rationalization, Projection, Reaction Formation, regression, Fixation • Conflict: Concept and Types of Conflicts

UNIT-III 3. School and Mental health:- • Teacher and Metal Health • Some Questionable School Practices • Personality Problems in Classroom • Classroom approaches to mental health • Place of Mental Hygiene in school curriculum • Principles of curriculum construction from mental hygiene point of view

UNIT-IV 42(257) 1. Religion and Mental health • Relationship between Religion and Mental Health • Positive and negative role of religion in Mental Health • Concept of Mental Health from Ancient Indian Point of View

SELECTED READINGS

1. Arkoff Abe (1968). Adjustment and Mental health, New York: Mc Graw Hill Company

2. Akhilananda S.(1952) Mental Health and Hindu Psychology, London: Alle and unwin

3. Akhilananda (1953), Hindu Psychology, London: Routledge

4. Bahadur Mal (1955) Mental in Theory and Practice, Hoshiarpur: V.V. R.I.

5. Bernard, Harold, W. (1952). Mental Hygiene for class-room teachers, New York: McGraw Hill Book Co.

6. Bonny, M. E.(1960) Mental Health in Education , Boston: Allyn and Bacon

7. Burbury, W.M. (Balient) et.al: An introduction to Child Guidance London: Mac Millan & Co.

8. Capuzzi D and Dougles,G.R: Introduction to Counselling. London: Allyn and Bacon

9. Carroll, H, A(1956).Mental Hygiene: The Dynamics of Adjustment (3rd ed.), Englewood Cliffs, New Jercy: Prentice Hall

10. Coleman, J.C. (1976).Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Bombay: D.B. Tara Porewala Sons & Co.

11. Crow, Lester D. & Crow, Alince(1952) Mental Hygiene, New York: Mc Graw Hill Book Company

12. Garg, B.R. (2002). An Introduction to Mental Health, Ambala: Associated Publicaitons

13. Hadfield, J.A. (1952). Psychology and Mental Health. London: George Allen and Unwin Ltd.

14. Kallam, S.G. eta (1975). Mental Health and Going to School, Chicago: University of Chicago, Press

15. Sinha, A.K. (1982). The concept of mental health in India and Western Psychologies, Kurukshetra: Vishal Publications

16. Suraj B & Dutt N.K. (1978). Mental Health through Education, New Delhi: Vision Books Publications

17. Suraj Bhan, (1952).Towards a Happier Education, Jallendhar City: University Publications

18. Thork, G.L. & Olson, S.L. (1999). Behavior Therapy: Concepts, Procedures and Application, London: Allyn Bacon

42(258) 19. Thorpe, L.P. (1950).The Psychological of Mental Health, New York: The Ronald Press Co.

20. Watkins Ted. R. & Callicut, J. W(1990). Mental Health: Policy & Practice Today, New Delhi: Saga Publications

21. Wolberg, L.R(1995) The Techniques of Psychotherapy, London: Jason Aronson Inc

42(259) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III COURSE – XIV (Opt. v): ECONOMICS OF EDUCATION (PART-ONE) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- 1. Acquaint the students with the basic concepts of economics of education. 2. Acquaint the students with the concept of education as major determinants of economical development. 3. Make the students aware of the productivity of education in economic development. 4. Acquaint the students with the concepts, nature, principles and procedures of educational planning. 5. Make the students understand the concept of educational planning of educational financing in India.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Economics of Education:- • Meaning • Aims • Scope and Significance 2. Education as consumption or Investment:- • Education as Consumption • Education as Investment • Difficulties in treating Education as consumption / investment

UNIT-II 3. Cost Analysis:- • Cost of Education • Components of Educational costs • Methods of determining costs • Problems arising in the application of the concept of cost in education

UNIT-III

4. Educational Planning:- • Concept, Needs and Goals of Educational Planning • Principles of Educational Planning • Approaches to Educational Planning • Educational Planning in India since Independence UNIT-IV

5. Education and Manpower Planning:- 42(260) • Concept of Manpower Planning • Forecasting Manpower needs • Techniques of Manpower Forecasting • Limitation of Manpower Forecasting

SELECTED READINGS

1. Alex, V. Alexender(1983) Human Capital Approach to Economic Development Metropolitan Book Co., New Delhi, July

2. Blaug, M. (1972)Economics of Education, the English Language Book Society and Penguin Books, England

3. Bertrand, Oliver(1992) Planning Human resources: Methods, Experiences and Practices, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi

4. Coombs, Philip H. An Hallack J, (1972) Managing Educational Costs UNESCO International Institute of Educational Planning

5. Hallack, J. (1969) the Analysis of Educational Costs & Expenditure, UNESCO, paris

6. Harbison, F and Myers Charles, A: Education, manpower and economic growth: Strategies of Human resource Development, Oxford & IBM Publishing Co.

7. Kneller, G.F. (1968) Education and Economics Thought, new York, John Wiley and Sons INC

8. Nagpal, S.C. and Mital A.C.(1993) Economics of Education, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

9. Natrajan, S. (1990) Introduction to Economics of Education, Sterling Publishers, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

10. Pandit, H.N. (1969) Measurement of Cost Productivity and Efficiency of Education, NCERT

11. Rao, VKRV(1965) Education and Human resource Development, Allied Pubshilers, New Delhi

12. Raza, Moonis(1986), Educational planning, A long Term Perspective, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi

13. Singh, Baljit(1983)Economics of Indian Education, Meenakshi Prakashan, new Delhi

14. Sodhi, T.S. (1990) Economics of Education, New Delhi: Vikas

15. Tilak, J.B.G. (1992) Educational Planning at Grass Roots, Ashish Publishing House, New Delhi

16. Vaiaey, J (1962) Costs of Education, London, Feber

17. UNESCO(1968), Readings in the Economics of Education , Paris, UNESCO Publications

42(261) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER III COURSE – XV: DISSERTATION

Dissertation Max. Marks: 100

Dissertation and viva-voce will be evaluated jointly be external and internal examiners.

42(262) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV PAPER-XVII: COMPARATIVE EDUCATION AND CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT (PART-TWO) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Acquaint the student with educational systems in terms of factors and approaches of Comparative Education 2. Orient the students with skills to assess the efficiency of educational systems of various countries in terms of prevailing trends in those countries 3. Create a perspective in the students about the implications of Education for solving the prevailing problems of Education in India. 4. Acquaint students with the concept of curriculum and syllabus and process of curriculum evaluation 5. Enable the students to develop an understanding about important principles of curriculum construction and factors affecting curriculum development. 6. Help students to understand issues, trends and researches in the area of curriculum in India

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Higher Education in U.K., U.S.A. & India 2. Distance Education – Its concept, needs and various concepts with reference to U.K. , Australia & India

UNIT-II 3. Educational Administration in U.K., U.S.A. & India 4. Teacher Education in U.K., U.S.A. & India

UNIT-III 5. Concept of Curriculum and Syllabus 6. Principles of Curriculum Development 7. Factors affecting Curriculum Development: Philosophical, Physiological, Sociological & Discipline oriented considerations

UNIT-IV 8. Different Models of Curriculum Development: Administrative, Grass Root, Demonstration & System Analysis 42(263) 9. Curriculum evaluation in terms of learning outcome – concept formative and summative evaluation. System of according marks, ratings and grades; Interpretation of Evaluation Results.

SELECTED READINGS

1. Andrey, A. & Howard N. (1978). Developing curriculum: A practical Guide. London: George Allen and Unwin.

2. Baradey, G.Z.F. (1964). Comparative methods in education. New Delhi: Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.

3. Cramer, I.F. & Brown, G.S. (1965). Contemporary education: A comparative study of National System. New York: Harcourt Brace & Company.

4. Dent, H.C. (1981). Educational system of England. London: George Allen and Unwon.

5. Denis, L. (1986). School curriculum planning. London: Hodder ad Stoughton.

6. Edward, A. K. (1960). The secondary schools curriculum. New York: Harper and Row Publishers. 7. Hans, N. (1961). Comparative education. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.

8. Harold A. & Elsic, J. A. (1957). The curriculum. New York: The MacMillan Company.

9. International encyclopedia of curriculum. (1991) London: Pergamon Oxford.

10. Sodhi T.S. (1988). A text book of comparative education New Delhi: Association of Indian Universities, IGNOU.

11. Kandel, I.L. (1963). Studies in comparative education. New York: George Harrup.

12. Parmaji, S, (1984). Distance education, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,

13. Reddy, R. G. (1988). Studies in Distance Education Association of Indian Universities, Delhi New: IGNOU.

14. William, M. A. (1966). Planning curriculum for schools. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

42(264) M.A. (FINAL) EDUCATION SEMESTER IV Course- XVII: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN INDIAN EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Develop a critical understanding of the challenges facing Indian Education today 2. Get the knowledge of the contemporary issues in Indian Education in global perspectives 3. Have a critical understanding of the development of Education as a distinct discipline

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Indian Education Commission 1964-66 2. National Policy of Education 1986 3. Revised National policy 1992

UNIT - II 4. Universalization of Education and related issues such as retention / completion rates in elementary schools. 5. Vocationalization of Education 6. Education for girls UNIT-III

7 Education of socially disadvantaged segments such as SC/ST/OBC 8 Issues relating to quality in Education and excellence 9 Issues relating to social equity providing equality of Educational opportunities

UNIT-IV

10 Issues pertaining to open learning and Distance Education system 11 Education for Human values and life skills 12 Issues relating to medium of instruction – Three language formula 13 Issues in respect of emotional integration and international understanding in the context of globalization

SELECTED READINGS 42(265) (1) Govt. of India, Ministry of Education. (1959). Report of the National Committee on Women’s Education.

(2) M.H.R.D. (1966). Report of the Education Commission – Education and National Development (1964- 1966), Ministry of Education, govt. of India, New Delhi.

(3) M.H.R.D. National Policy on Education (1986), Ministry of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi.

(4) M.H.R.D. Programme of Action (1992), Ministry of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi.

(5) M.H.R.D. (1990). Towards an Enlightened & Humane Society – A Review (NPERC), Ministry of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi.

(6) M.H.R.D. (1993). Education for all: The Indian Science, Ministry of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi.

(7) M.H.R.D. (1993). Selected Education study, Ministry of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi.

(8) Rao, D.D. (2001). National Policy on Education towards an Enlightened and Human Society. New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.

(9) Tiwari, D.D. (1975). Education at the Cross Roads, Chugh publication, Allahbad

42(266) M.A. (FINAL) EDUCATION SEMESTER IV COURSE-XVIII (Opt. i): SPECIAL EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- Students will be able to: 1. Define the concept of exceptional Children 2. Explain the needs and problems of Exceptional Children 3. Describe the meaning and scope of Special Education in India 4. Describe the meaning of Integrated / Inclusive Education 5. Explain various types of disabled children and their cause 6. Describe various types of educational programmers for exception children.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-1 1. Education of Hearing Impaired • Characteristic • Types • Identification • Etiology • Education and Intervention Programmes

UNIT-II 2. Education of Learning Disabled • Characteristic • Types • Identification • Education and Intervention Programmes

UNIT-III 3. Education of Gifted & Creative • Characteristic • Identification • Problems • Education Programmes 4. Education of Juvenile Delinquents • Characteristic 42(267) • Identification • Problems • Etiology • Education and Intervention Programmes

UNIT-IV 5. Guidance and Counseling for Exceptional Children • Meaning and Need

SELECTED READINGS

(1) Bender, W.N. (1995). Learning Disability, London: Allyn & Bacon

(2) Berdine, W.H. & Blackhurst A.E. (1980). An Introduction to Special Education, Boston: Herpes Collins publishers

(3) Dash, M. (2007). Education of Exceptional Children, New Delhi: Atlantic Ppblisher and distributors (P Ltd.)

(4) Dunn, L. & Bay, D.M. (Education.) (1973). Exceptional Children in the Shcools, New York: Holt, Rinehart Winston.

(5) Hallahan D.P & Kauffman, J.M. (1991). Exceptional Children: Introduction to Special Education, London: Allyn & Bacon

(6) Hewett, F.M. & Foreness S.R. (1994). Education of Exceptional Learners, London.

(7) Jorden, T.E. (1977). The Exceptional Child, Ohio: Merrill

(8) Kirk S.A. & Gallagher J.J. (2002). Education of Exceptional Children, Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co.

(9) Magnifico, L.X. (1998). Education of the Exceptional Child, New York: Longmen.

(10) Shanker, U. (1978). Exceptional Children, Jallandhar: Steering Publications.

(11) Singh, N.N. & Beale. I. L. (1992). Learning Disabilities – Nature, Theory and Treatment, New York: Springer Verlag

(12) Smith, C.R. (1991). Learning Disabilities- The interaction of learner, Task and Setting, Massachusetts, London: Allyn & Bacon

(13) Strange, Ruth. (2004). Exceptional Children & Youth, N.J.: Prentice Hall

(14) Role of Teachers and other Specialities

42(268) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV COURSE XVIII (Opt. ii): EDUCATIONAL MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- The students will be able to: 1. Acquaint the student with the basic concepts and practices adopted in educational measurement and evaluation. 2. Orient the students with tools and techniques of measurement and evaluation. 3. Develop skills and competencies in constructing and standardizing a test. 4. Make the students understand how various requirements of education are measured, evaluated, interpreted and their rules are recorded to help learners. 5. Develop the ability to explain and use appropriate statistical techniques and test of significance in measurement and evaluation.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Characteristics of good measuring Instruments • Concepts of True and Errors scores • Reliability • Validity • Norms • Usability UNIT-II

2. New trends in Measurement and Evaluation • Grading system: relative merits and demerits of marking and grading • Semester system • Continuous and comprehensive evaluation • Question banks • Use of computer in evaluation

UNIT-III

42(269) 3. Test Standardization • Norm referenced and criterion referenced tests • Standard scores: T-score and C-score • Construction and Standardization of an achievement test • Interpretation of test scores and methods of feedback to students

UNIT-IV 4. Correlation: concept, computation and significance of the following: • Biserial correlation • Point-biserial correlation • Tetrachoric correlation • Phi-correlation • Partial Correlation • Multiple correlation

SELECTED READINGS

1. Adams, G.K. (1965). Measurement and Evaluation in Psychology, Education and Guidance, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, New York

2. Aggarwal, Y.P. (1998). Statistical Methods: Concepts , Applications and Computation, Sterling, New Delhi

3. Aggarwal, R.N. and Asthana, V. (1983). Educational Measurement and Evaluation, Vinod, Agra.

4. Aiken, L.R. (1985). Psychological Testing and Assessment, Allyn and Bacon, Boston

5. Anastasi, A. (1982). Psychological Testing, Mac Millan, New York

6. Cronbach, L.J. (1964). Essentials of psychological Testing, Harper and row, New York

7. Ebel, R.L. and Frisbe, D.A. (1990). Essentials of Educational Measurement, prentice Hall, New Delhi

8. Freeman, F.S(1965). Theory and Practice of Psychology Testing, Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1965

42(270) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV COURSE – XVIII (Opt. iii) TEACHER EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20) Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions. • Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. • Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to understand about the:- (1) Teaching profession and types of teacher Education programmes (2) Development of teacher Education curriculum in India (3) Different competencies essential for a teacher for effective transaction (4) Research in various areas of teacher education

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Distance Education and Teacher Education 2. Orientation and refresher courses 3. Preparing teachers for special schools 4. Implementation of curricula of teacher Education at various levels

UNIT-II 5. Various agencies for in-service teacher Education 6. Objectives and organization of practice teaching 7. Current problems of teacher Education and practicing schools

UNIT-III 8. Instruction strategies in Teacher Education 9. Lecture strategy 10. Discussion 11. Brain Storming 12. Simulation 13. Action research 14. Supervised study

UNIT-IV 15. Areas of research in teacher Education with special emphasis on • Teacher effectiveness • Problems of admission to teacher Education • Modification of teacher Behavior • School effectiveness

42(271) SELECTED READINGS

1. Dunkin, J. Michal (1987) The International Encyclopedia of Teaching and Teacher Education, Pergamon Press.

2. Husen, Torsten & Postlethwaite (Eds.) (1994), The International Encyclopedia of Education Pergamon Press, New York, Vol. 1-12.

3. Mangla, Sheela (2000), Teacher Education: Trends & Strategies, New Delhi: Radha Publishing.

4. Millman, J. (1988) Handbook of teacher Education, Boverly Hills: Sage Publishing House.

5. Mitzel, H.E. (1982), Encyclopedia of Educational Research (5th Ed.) New York: Free Press.

6. Nayar, D.P. (1989) Towards a national system of Education, New Delhi: Mittal Publishing.

7. Ryan, Kelvin,(1975) Teacher Education, NSSE: University of Chicago Press

8. Sarason, S.B., Davidson, K. & Blatt, B.(1962) The Preparation of Teachers: An Unstudied Problem in Education, New York: John Wiley.

9. Stones & Morris, (1973) Teaching-Practices-Problems and Prospects, Methuen & Co., London, 1973

42(272) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV COURSE XVIII (Opt. iv) COMPUTER EDUCATION (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: (1) Explain the meaning & uses of different types of networking in computers (2) To enable the students to use internet in day to day learning (3) To describe the use of power point presentation in teaching learning (4) To explain the utility of multi-media process in Education

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Networking on Computers • Meaning of Networking • Need of Networking • Types of Networking • Use of Networking in Education

UNIT-II

2. Internet • Meaning of Internet • Internet Tools • E-Mail • Browsers • Visiting Web Sites

UNIT-III

3. Application Oriented Information • Data Bases and its uses-M S Access • Using power point for creating and manipulating of presentations in class-room

UNIT-IV

42(273) 4. Multi-Media & its usage • Meaning of multi-media • Importance of Multi-Media • Scope of Multimedia • Use of Multi-Media in Education

SELECTED READINGS

1. Cox, J. and Urban, P. (1999). Quick courses in Microsoft Office, New Delhi, Galgotia Publications.

2. Jain, Satish, (1990). Introduction to Computer Science and Basic Programming. New Delhi, BPB Publications.

3. Rajaraman, V., (1996). Fundamentals of Computers, , New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.

4. Saxena, S, (1998). A first Course in computers, , New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd..

5. Sinha, P.K., (2003). Computer Fundamentals: New York, BPB Publications.

6. Tanenbaun, A.S., (1998) Computer Networks”, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.

42(274) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV COURSE – XVIII (Opt. v): ADULT AND CONTINUING EDUCATION (PART-TWO) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

•Q. No. 1 will be compulsory and will carry 16 marks. It will comprise of 4 short answer type notes of 4 marks each to be selected from the entire syllabus. •Two long answer type questions will be set from each of the four units, out of which the students will be required to attempt one question from each unit. Long answer questions will carry 16 marks each.

UNIT-I 2. The role of Mass Media (Radio, T.V., Films and Newspapers) in Adult Education and problems with regard to converge.

UNIT-II 3. Agencies of Adult Education – Central Govt., State Govt., Sharmik Vidyapeeths, State Resource Centre, Universities, Voluntary Organizations.

UNIT-III 4. Success Stories of Literacy Campaigns of following countries:- • Cuba (Cuban Mass Literacy Campaign) • Brazil (Brazilian Literacy Movement) • Tanzania (Tanzania Mass Literacy Campaign), and • Vietnam (Mass Literacy Campaign in Socialist Republic of Vietnam)

UNIT-IV

4. Problems of Adult Education 5. Research Priorities in Adult Education 6. Evaluation Procedure in Adult Education, Types of Evaluation, Formative and Summative Evaluation

SELECTED READINGS

42(275) 1. Bordia, Anil, J.R. Kidd & J.A. Drapert(eds.) (1973). Adult Education in India – A Book of Readings, Bombay: Nachiketa Publications Ltd.

2. Bhatia, S.C. & Srivansava(1978). Literacy, Literacy Materials and their preparation: A General perspective, New Delhi: Directorate f Adult Education

3. Bhola, H.S. (1984) Campaigning for Literacy – Eight National Experiences of the Twentieth Century with a memorandum to decision makers, UNESCO, Paris

4. Coles, Edwin K. Townsend (1977). Adult Education in Developing countries, New York, Pergamon Press.

5. Cropley, A.J. (1977). Life Long Education: A Psychological Analysis, New York, Pergamon Press.

6. Dutta, S.C. (1987). Adult Education in the Third World, New Delhi and Criterion Publications

7. Dutta, S.C. (1973). Social Education and Social Balures in Adult Education in India, Bombay: Nachoketa Publications

8. Dutta, S.C. (1986). History of Adult Education in India, New Delhi, Indian Adult Education Association , 1986

9. Draper, James A (1989). Adult Education, A Focus for the Social Sciences, New Delhi: Indian Adult Education Association 10. Houle, Cyril, O (1964). Counting Your Education New York, Mc Graw Hill Co.

11. Indian Adult Education Association (1980). Handbook for Adult Education Instructors, New Delhi

12. Husan, T: International Encyclopedia of Education, New York, pergamon Press

13. Jarvis, Petet(1987). Twentieth Century Thinkers in Adult Education. London, Vroom Belm

14. Kundu, C.L.: Adult Education (1984). Principals, Practice and Persects, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers

15. Kundu, C.L. (1987). Adult Education Research: Future Directions, University

16. Mathur, R.S. & Prem Chand(1981). Adult Education Programme: Analysis of Strength and Deficiencey, New Delhi, Indian Adult Education Association

17. Ministry of Human Resource Development: National Literacy Policy of Education, Govt. of India , New Delhi

18. Ministry of Human Resource Development,(1986) National Policy of Education, Govt. of India, New Delhi

19. Mohsin, S.R. , J.L. Sachdeva & Asha Sehgal (1983) Adult Education Programme, New Delhi: Indian – Adult Education Association

20. Nimbalkar, M.R.(1987): Adult Education and its Evaluation System Delhi, Mittal Publications

42(276) 21. Rogers, Alan (1986): Teaching Adults, England Open University, Press

22. Shab, S.Y. A Source Book on Adlut Education, New Delhi, Directorate of Adult Education

23. Sharan B. Merriam, Phyllis M. Cnningham (1989) Handbook of Adult and Continuing Education, Jossey Bass Publishers, San Francisco, London, 1989 24. Styler, W.eE.: Adult Education in India, Bombay : Oxford University Press, 1966

25. Yadav, R.S.: Adult Education – Concept, Theory and Practice, Associated Publishers, Ambala Cantt.

42(277) M.A. (EDUCATION) IV SEMESTER COURSE XIX (Opt. i) MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF EDUCATION (Part Two)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Acquaint the students with (laughing concepts of education management along with their significance. 2. Help the students to understand educational management as a process at various levels. 3. Develop an udnerstand9ng in students about education and problems of educational trends. 4. Help the students to know about resources of education and problems of educational finance. 5. Assist the students to learn about planning and organizing.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1 Educational planning • Meaning and Nature, need & Importance of Educational Planning • Problems of Educational Planning • Approaches of Educational Planning UNIT-II 2. Kinds of Educational Planning. • Institutional Planning • Perspective Planning

UNIT-III 3. Educational supervision: • Meaning and Nature of Educational supervision • Traditional and Modern supervision • Need and function of educational supervision 5. Supervision as a: • Service Activity • Process • function

42(278) UNIT-IV 6. Planning organizing and Implementing Supervisory Programmers. 7. Principles of educational supervision

SELECTED READINGS:

1. Bahtanagar, R.P. & Aggarwal, V. (2004). Educational Administration, Supervision, Planning and Financing. Merrut: R.Lall. Book Depot 2. Harding, H. (1987). Management Appreciation. London: Pitman Publishing. 3. Ravishankar, S., Mishra, R.k., & Sharms, M.L. (1988). Human Resource Development. Bombay: Dhrav & Deep. 4. Shukla, P.D. (1983). Administration of Education in India. New Delhi: Vikas Publication. 5. Sinha, P.S.N. (Ed) (2002). Management and Administration in Govt. New Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers. 6. Spears, H. (1955). Improving the Supervision of Instruction. N.Y.: Prentice Hall. 7. Unruh, A. & Turner, E. (1970). Supervision for change and invocation. New York. 8. Wiles, K. (1955) .supervision for Better Schools. N.Y.: Prentice Hall.

42(279) M. A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV PAPER XIX (Opt. ii) EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- To enable the students to: 1. Acquaint the students with skill of framing educational objectives. 2. Enable the students to learn teaching skills through Micro teaching. 3. Enable the students to use educational technology for improving teacher’s behaviour. 4. Enable the students to develop different types of evaluation tools.

COURSE CONTENTS

UNIT-I 1. Modification of Teaching behavior: Micro teaching, Flanders Interaction Analysis and Simulation 2. Communication process: Concept of communication, principles, Modes and Barriers to communication, class room communication (Interaction, Verbal and Non-Verbal).

UNIT-II

3. Models of Teaching: Concept , Different families of Teaching Models 4. Designing Instructional System: Formulation of instructional objectives & task Analysis.

UNIT-III

5. Designing of Instructional Strategies: Lecture, Team Teaching, Discussion, Seminar, tutorial and Brain storming sessions. 6. Development of Evaluation Tools: Norms Referenced Tests and Criterion referenced tests UNIT-IV

7. Application of Educational Technology in Distance Education : • Concept of Distance Education • Differentiate between Distance and Open Learning Systems • Students Support Services in Distance Education • Evaluation process in Distance Education • Counseling in Distance Education

42(280) SELECTED READINGS

(1)Davies, I.K. (1971). The management of learning. London: Mc Graw Hill.

(2)Dececco, J.P.(1998). The psychology of learning and instruction. New Delhi: Prentice Hall

(3)Kulkarni, S.S. (1986). Introduction to educational technology. New Delhi, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company.

(4)Kumar, K.L. (1996) Educational technology. New Delhi: New Age International Publishers.

(5)Locatis, C.N. and Atkinson, F.D.(1984) Media and technology for education and training. London: Charles E. publishing Co.

(6)Mavi, N.S. (1984) Programmed learning: An empirical approach. Kurukshetra , Vishal Publishers.

(7)Joyce, B. & Weil, M. (1992). Models of teaching. New Delhi, prentice Hall.

(8)Merrit, M.D. (1971) Instructional design. New York:

(9)Mukhopadhyay, M. (1990). Educational technology. New Delhi: Sterling.

(10) Pandey, K.P.(1980). A first course in instructional technology. Delhi: Amitash Parkashan.

(11) Pandey, S. K.(1997).Teaching communication. New Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers.

(12) Pandey, K.P. (1997). Dynamics of teaching behavior. Gaziabad: Amitash Prakashan.

(13) Prcival, F. and Ellington, H., (1998). A handbook of educational technology. New York: Kogan Page.

(14) Skinner, B.F. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton Century Crofts.

(15) Vedanayagam, E.G. (1988). Teaching technology for college teachers. New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.

42(281) M.A. EDUCATION IV SEMESTER PAPER – XIX (Opt. iii) EDUCATIONAL AND VOCATIONAL GUIDANCE (PART-TWO)

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- The students will be able to: 1. Understand life and the world around. 2. Understand the importance of making right choice in life, education, vocation etc. 3. Understand the importance of working with a group, for a group and in a group. 4. Understand that every individual is capable of making some unique contribution to the all round growth and development of the society because of his unique potentialities. 5. Assess the needs of the individual correctly.

UNIT-I 1. Occupational information – meaning and need. Methods of imparting occupational information. Sources of occupational information in India.

UNIT-II 2. Job Analysis-Meaning, Types and Purposes of Job Analysis 3. Job Satisfaction- Meaning & Factors affecting Job Satisfaction

UNIT-III 4. Placement Service –Meaning, Functions and Principles 5. Follow-up Service – Meaning, purposes and characteristics

UNIT-IV 6. Study of the individual, data collection techniques of Information – Standardized and Non-Standardized techniques: Anecdotal Records, Biographies, Rating Scale, Case Study, Sociometry, Questionnaire, Observation and Interview and Commutative Record Card.

42(282) SELECTED READINGS

1. Bernard, H. W & Daniel F.W. (1977). Principles of Guidance, Second Edition, New York – Thomas Y. Crowell Company.

2. Jones, J.A.: (1970). Principles of Guidance, Bombay: Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Miller, F.W. (1961). Guidance Principles and Services, Columbia : Ohio Merrill

4. Pandey, K.P.(2000). Educational and Vocational Guidance in India,Varanasi: Vishwa Vidyalaya Prakashan Chowk

5. Tolbert, E.L. (1967) Introduction of Counseling, New York: McGraw Hill.

6. Strang, Ruth. (1949). Counseling Technics in colleges and Secondary Schools, New York: Harpar

7. Taxler, A.E.(1964): Techniques of Guidance, New York: Mc Grwa Hill

8. Robinson, F.P (1950) Principles and Procedures in student counseling, New York: Harper & Brother

9. Super, D.E.,( 1949) Apprising Vocational Fitness, New York: Harper and Brother

42(283) M.A. (EDUCATION) SEMESTER IV COURSE –XIX (Opt. iv): MENTAL HYGIENE AND EDUCATION (PART-TWO) Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 100 (External: 80, Internal: 20)

Note: Paper setters will set 9 questions in all out of which students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:- The students will be able to develop material for:- 1. Define concept of mental health and hygiene. 2. Develop material for good mental health in both teachers and students. 3. Explain principles and conditions conductive to good mental health. 4. Define measures for fostering good mental health among students. 5. Explain the interrelationship among personality adjustment and mental health. 6. Define the understanding of the role of home, school and society in mental health.

COURSE CONTENTS:

UNIT-I

1. Relationship between Human Needs and Mental Health:- • Nature of Needs • Organic Socio-Psychological and Educational Needs • Meeting the needs of Children • Special Needs of Indian Adolescents

UNIT-II 2. Diagnostic and Remedial Techniques:- • Case Study, Interview, Psycho Analysis, Individual and Group Psycho Therapies and their usefulness • Psychotherapies: Counseling Therapy and its types • Play Therapy, rational Emotive Psychotherapy, Behaviour Therapy

UNIT-III

3. Home, Community and Mental Health:- • Home and Mental Health • Qualities of Healthy home environment • Child rearing practices and personality development • Community and mental health

42(284) UNIT-IV

4. Yoga for mental Health:- • Concept of Yoga in Ancient India • Yoga as the Scientific method for the development of personality • Yoga as the system for Preserving the Mental Health • Accepting Yoga in the Modern life